2b96e371e1
* configure.in: Bump up release number. * Release: Version 2.0.10 "Holy Hand Grenade of Antioch" released. svn: r6011
8116 lines
281 KiB
XML
8116 lines
281 KiB
XML
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
|
<!-- <?yelp:chunk-depth 3?> -->
|
|
<!--
|
|
User Manual for Gramps - a GTK+/GNOME based genealogy program
|
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 2003-2005 Alexander Roitman
|
|
|
|
This document is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
|
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
|
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
|
|
(at your option) any later version.
|
|
|
|
This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
|
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
|
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
|
|
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<!-- $Id$ -->
|
|
|
|
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
|
|
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" [
|
|
|
|
<!-- Information about the entities
|
|
The legal.xml file contains legal information, there is no need to edit the file.
|
|
Use the appversion entity to specify the version of the application.
|
|
Use the manrevision entity to specify the revision number of this manual.
|
|
Use the date entity to specify the release date of this manual.
|
|
Use the app entity to specify the name of the application. -->
|
|
|
|
<!ENTITY appversion "2.0.10">
|
|
<!ENTITY manrevision "2.6">
|
|
<!ENTITY date "January 2006">
|
|
<!ENTITY app "GRAMPS">
|
|
|
|
]>
|
|
<!--
|
|
(Do not remove this comment block.)
|
|
Maintained by the GNOME Documentation Project
|
|
http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gdp
|
|
Template version: 2.0 beta
|
|
Template last modified Apr 11, 2002
|
|
-->
|
|
<book id="index" lang="en">
|
|
<!--
|
|
please do not change the id; for translations, change lang to
|
|
appropriate code
|
|
-->
|
|
<bookinfo>
|
|
<title>GRAMPS Manual V&manrevision;</title>
|
|
<copyright>
|
|
<year>2001</year>
|
|
<holder>Donald N. Allingham</holder>
|
|
</copyright>
|
|
<copyright>
|
|
<year>2003-2005</year>
|
|
<holder>Alex Roitman</holder>
|
|
</copyright>
|
|
|
|
<!-- translators: uncomment this:
|
|
|
|
<copyright>
|
|
<year>2002</year>
|
|
<holder>ME-THE-TRANSLATOR (Latin translation)</holder>
|
|
</copyright>
|
|
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
An address can be added to the publisher information. If a role is
|
|
not specified, the publisher/author is the same for all versions of the
|
|
document.
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<publisher>
|
|
<publishername>GRAMPS Project</publishername>
|
|
</publisher>
|
|
|
|
<legalnotice id="legalnotice">
|
|
<para>
|
|
This manual is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
|
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
|
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
|
|
(at your option) any later version.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
|
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
|
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
|
|
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
|
|
</para>
|
|
</legalnotice>
|
|
|
|
<authorgroup>
|
|
<author>
|
|
<firstname>Alex</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Roitman</surname>
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
|
|
<address><email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
</author>
|
|
<author>
|
|
<firstname>Donald N.</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Allingham</surname>
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
|
|
<address><email>don@gramps-project.org</email></address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
</author>
|
|
|
|
<!-- This is appropriate place for other contributors: translators,
|
|
maintainers, etc. Commented out by default.
|
|
|
|
<othercredit role="translator">
|
|
<firstname>Latin</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Translator 1</surname>
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>Latin Translation Team</orgname>
|
|
<address> <email>translator@gnome.org</email> </address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
<contrib>Latin translation</contrib>
|
|
</othercredit>
|
|
-->
|
|
</authorgroup>
|
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
According to GNU GPL, revision history is mandatory if you are
|
|
modifying/reusing someone else's document. If not, you can omit it.
|
|
Remember to remove the &manrevision; entity from the revision entries other
|
|
than the current revision.
|
|
The revision numbering system for GNOME manuals is as follows:
|
|
* the revision number consists of two components
|
|
* the first component of the revision number reflects the release version
|
|
of the GNOME desktop.
|
|
* the second component of the revision number is a decimal unit that is
|
|
incremented with each revision of the manual.
|
|
For example, if the GNOME desktop release is V2.x, the first version of the
|
|
manual that is written in that desktop time frame is V2.0, the second version
|
|
of the manual is V2.1, etc. When the desktop release version changes to V3.x,
|
|
the revision number of the manual changes to V3.0, and so on.
|
|
-->
|
|
<revhistory>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V&manrevision;</revnumber>
|
|
<date>&date;</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.5</revnumber>
|
|
<date>February 2004</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.4</revnumber>
|
|
<date>December 2003</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.3</revnumber>
|
|
<date>September 2003</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.2</revnumber>
|
|
<date>July 2003</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="author">Donald A. Peterson
|
|
<email>dpeterson@sigmaxi.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.1</revnumber>
|
|
<date>May 2003</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.0</revnumber>
|
|
<date>April 2003</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS User Manual V1.1</revnumber>
|
|
<date>2001</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Donald N. Allingham
|
|
<email>don@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>gramps User Manual V1.0</revnumber>
|
|
<date>2001</date>
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Donald N. Allingham
|
|
<email>don@gramps-project.org</email>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
</revhistory>
|
|
|
|
<releaseinfo>
|
|
This manual describes version &appversion; of GRAMPS.
|
|
</releaseinfo>
|
|
|
|
</bookinfo>
|
|
|
|
<preface id="gramps-preface">
|
|
|
|
<title>Preface</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS is a software package designed for genealogical
|
|
research. Although similar to other genealogical programs, GRAMPS
|
|
offers some unique and powerful features, which we'll discuss
|
|
below. </para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS is a Open Source Software package, which means you
|
|
are free to make copies and distribute it to anyone you like.
|
|
It's developed and maintained by a worldwide team of volunteers
|
|
whose goal is to make GRAMPS powerful, yet easy to use.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="why-gramps">
|
|
<title>Why use GRAMPS?</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most genealogy programs allow you to enter information
|
|
about your ancestors and descendants. Typically, they can
|
|
display family relationships through charts, graphs, or
|
|
reports. Some allow you to include pictures or other media. Most
|
|
let you include information about people even if those people
|
|
are not related to the primary family you happen to be
|
|
researching. And they may include features that let you exchange
|
|
data with other programs and print different types of
|
|
reports. </para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS has all these capabilities and more. Notably, it
|
|
allows you to integrate bits and pieces of data as they arise
|
|
from your research and to put them in one place — your
|
|
computer. You can then use your computer to manipulate,
|
|
correlate, and analyze your data, rather than messing with reams
|
|
of paper. </para>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="whats-new">
|
|
<title>What's new since 1.0.X</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you are new to GRAMPS, it may not be important for you
|
|
to know how GRAMPS version 2.0.0 (the object of this manual)
|
|
differs from previous versions of the software. You may
|
|
therefore elect to skip this section.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>However, if you are already familiar with GRAMPS and are
|
|
interested in the new aspects and features of version 2.0.0,
|
|
please read on.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Berkeley database backend</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>We've adopted the Berkeley database format (BSDDB) as
|
|
the default for GRAMPS. Berkeley is the most widely used
|
|
open source developer database in the world.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This change allowed us to overcome issues of
|
|
performance and memory requirements that beset version
|
|
1.0.X. With the new back-end, database sizes of up to a
|
|
hundred thousand people no longer present a major
|
|
obstacle.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The default extension for GRAMPS' BSDDB database files
|
|
is grdb. The new format is open and fully documented in the
|
|
developer's API reference distributed with the source code
|
|
of GRAMPS. </para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="default-format">
|
|
<title>Preferred format</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The preferred and default format for &app; is the
|
|
new BSDDB format.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>A consequence of the new database back-end is that the
|
|
"saving" function is no longer necessary (or even
|
|
possible). Now, once you approve changes, they are
|
|
immediately applied; this means that clicking
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the Person, Family, Source,
|
|
Place, Media object, or Event editor immediately records
|
|
changes to the database. </para>
|
|
|
|
<para>In previous versions, you could "quit without
|
|
saving." This option no longer exists per se; however,
|
|
in version 2.0.0, you can achieve the same effect if you
|
|
abandon or "cancel" all changes and then
|
|
quit.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Also, it is now possible to undo recent
|
|
actions.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Other database back-ends</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>Along with the BSDDB backend, we've incorporated
|
|
"in-memory" database handling for the GRAMPS XML
|
|
and GEDCOM formats. This means you can now open files in
|
|
those two formats and work with their data without having to
|
|
first create a new database and import data into it. Since
|
|
this approach requires GRAMPS to hold all the data in
|
|
memory, it is only useful for small databases (depending on
|
|
available memory size).</para>
|
|
|
|
<warning id="gedcom-editing">
|
|
<title>GEDCOM Editing</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Please keep in mind that some information in a
|
|
GEDCOM file may be lost during import into GRAMPS. Simply
|
|
opening and viewing the file will not change it. However,
|
|
if any changes were made and they were not abandoned upon
|
|
exit, exiting GRAMPS will save the data, with the possible
|
|
data loss.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Desktop integration</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>We've improved the way GRAMPS integrates with the GNOME
|
|
desktop interface common to many Linux distributions. All file
|
|
formats recognized by GRAMPS are now registered as mime types;
|
|
each has its own icon and has GRAMPS as its default
|
|
handler. Thus, if you double-click on any file having one of
|
|
these formats, GRAMPS will launch and open the file.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>We've also added support for GNOME's "recent
|
|
documents" function and have incorporated this function
|
|
within GRAMPS itself.</para>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Interface improvements</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>We've made numerous changes in the interface. Most of
|
|
them are subtle and incremental improvements, and all of them
|
|
cannot be listed here. The most notable are:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Removal of alphabetical tabs.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Ability to add/remove/rearrange columns in list views.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Removal of the Save function and addition of Undo.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Proper window management.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Support for Tip of the Day.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Person-dependent context menus (right-click) in
|
|
Pedigree View, listing parents, children, spouses, and
|
|
siblings.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Addition of an Export wizard.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Built-in Find function in list views.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Addition of a Date selector dialog.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Name editor enhancements: patronymic names and
|
|
non-default grouping.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>"Recent document" support (both within GRAMPS and
|
|
GNOME-wide)</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Import and Export</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>We've added import and export filters for the GeneWeb format.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Reports</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>We've added a new report: Statistics Chart. </para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>We've changed the overall report framework. All
|
|
reports now remember the options you configure for
|
|
them.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>It is possible to generate reports from the command
|
|
line, without launching an interactive GRAMPS
|
|
session.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The report API is much simpler now, making it easy to
|
|
write custom reports.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A single code instance may be used for a standalone
|
|
report, a book item, and a command-line report. </para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Internationalization</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The approach for entering and displaying dates has
|
|
been completely reworked. The new framework allows for a
|
|
deeper localization of displayed dates than was ever
|
|
possible using the translatable strings.</para>
|
|
<para>The internationalization of names has also been
|
|
improved. Names can be grouped under a non-default
|
|
string. Patronymic names are supported, and it is easy to
|
|
program new ways to display names in the manner customary to
|
|
a given culture or language.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="typography">
|
|
<title>Typographical conventions</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
In this book, some words are marked with special typography:
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<application>Applications</application>
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<command>Commands</command> you type at the command line
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<filename>Filenames</filename>
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<replaceable>Replaceable text</replaceable>
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<guilabel>Labels</guilabel> for buttons and other
|
|
portions of the graphical interface
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
Menu selections look like this:
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Menu</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>Submenu</guisubmenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Menu Item</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<guibutton>Buttons</guibutton> you can click
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>
|
|
<userinput>Anything you type in</userinput>
|
|
</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The manual also provides assorted bits of additional information in
|
|
tips and notes, as follows.
|
|
|
|
<tip id="example-tip">
|
|
<title>Tip</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Tips and bits of extra information will look like
|
|
this.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<note id="example-note">
|
|
<title>Note</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Notes will look like this.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
Finally, there are warnings, notifying you where you should be careful:
|
|
|
|
<warning id="example-warning">
|
|
<title>Example Warning</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This is what a warning looks like. If there's a chance
|
|
you'll run into trouble, you will be warned beforehand.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
</preface>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-getting-started">
|
|
|
|
<title>Getting Started</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
In this chapter, we'll begin with the basics. We'll show you how
|
|
to start &app; and how to get help when you need it.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-start">
|
|
<title>To Start GRAMPS</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
You can start &app; in the following ways:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the <guimenu>Applications</guimenu> menu</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>Select &app; from the list of programs displayed in
|
|
your computer's Applications menu. (The location and
|
|
appearance of this menu vary slightly from one distribution
|
|
of Linux to another. On the default GNOME desktop, you'll
|
|
find &app; in the
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Applications</guimenu><guisubmenu>Other</guisubmenu></menuchoice>
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the command line</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you're adept with Linux and like to work from the command
|
|
line, you can start &app; by calling up a terminal window,
|
|
typing <command>gramps</command>, and then pressing
|
|
<keycap>Enter</keycap>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you would like GRAMPS to open a specific database or to
|
|
import a specific file on startup, you can supply the filename
|
|
as a command line argument:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
<filename>gramps filename.grdb</filename>
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
where <filename>filename.grdb</filename> is the name of
|
|
the file you want to open. The command line provides many
|
|
more ways to start &app; and perform different tasks.
|
|
<!-- The detailed reference to the command line options is found in <xref linkend="append-cmdline"/>. -->
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="run-1st-time">
|
|
<title>Running GRAMPS for the first time</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The first time you run the program, GRAMPS will display the
|
|
"Getting Started" dialogs. Follow the directions that
|
|
guide you through <guilabel>Researcher information</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Numerical date formats</guilabel>, <guilabel>Alternate
|
|
calendar support</guilabel>, and <guilabel>the LDS
|
|
extensions</guilabel> sections. You should find them to be
|
|
self-explanatory.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="note-dialog">
|
|
<title>Dialog boxes</title>
|
|
<para>We'll make frequent reference in this manual to
|
|
dialogs. A dialog is simply a pop-up window into which you can
|
|
enter information.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>We recommend you enter your personal information when GRAMPS
|
|
prompts you for it. GRAMPS uses this information strictly so it
|
|
can create valid GEDCOM output files (which require information
|
|
about the files' creator). If you wish, you can choose not to
|
|
supply this information, but be aware that unless and until you
|
|
do, any GEDCOM files you export will not be valid.</para>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<figure id="druid-fig">
|
|
<title>GRAMPS Getting Started Window: Researcher Information</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/researcher.png" format="PNG"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Researcher Information Window. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<tip id="preferences-tip">
|
|
<title>Entering personal information</title>
|
|
<para>This information can be entered at any time in the
|
|
Preferences dialog, under the Database/Researcher Information
|
|
category.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="choose-db-start">
|
|
<title>Choosing a database on startup</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If &app; is started without a database selected, the following
|
|
window will appear prompting you to choose one to open.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="first-open">
|
|
<title>Open Database Window</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/first-open.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Open Database Window.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>To open a database that you have recently opened, choose the
|
|
top selection, select your database from the menu and
|
|
click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To open an existing database you have not recently opened,
|
|
choose the middle selection and click
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton>. &app; will then ask you to specify the
|
|
name of the database you wish to open. </para>
|
|
|
|
<para>As you might guess, to create a new database, choose
|
|
"Create a new database"</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="file-notdir-note">
|
|
<title>Selecting file</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you're familiar with version 1.0.X of GRAMPS, you'll note
|
|
that version 2.0 does not require you to select a directory in
|
|
which to store the database.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="get-help">
|
|
<title>Obtaining Help</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
GRAMPS has a <menuchoice><guimenu>Help</guimenu></menuchoice> menu
|
|
that you can consult at any time. It includes the following items:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>User manual</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
An electronic version of the manual that you can access while you work in GRAMPS.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>FAQ</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A list of Frequently Asked Questions about &app;.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS home page</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A link to the GRAMPS' project web site.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS mailing lists</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Gives you direct access to GRAMPS' mailing list archives.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Report a bug</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Choose this item to file a bug report in our bug tracking
|
|
system. (Remember, &app; is a living project. We want to
|
|
know about any problems you encounter so we can work to
|
|
solve them for everyone's benefit.)
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Show plugin status</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Use this item to display the status of any plugins you may have added.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Open example database</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Select this item to load the example database that is
|
|
included in your GRAMPS package. This database is composed
|
|
of fictitious people and serves as a useful example for
|
|
learning how to work with GRAMPS.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-mainwin">
|
|
|
|
<title>Main Window</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
When you open a database (either existing or new), the
|
|
following window is displayed:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="mainwin-fig" pgwide="1">
|
|
<title>GRAMPS Main Window</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/mainwin.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="352" scale="70"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The main &app; window contains the following elements:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Menubar</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The menubar is located at the very top of the window (right
|
|
below the window title) and provides access to all the features
|
|
of &app;.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Toolbar</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The toolbar is located right below the menubar. It gives you
|
|
access to the most frequently used
|
|
functions of &app;. You can set options that control how it
|
|
appears by going to
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu></menuchoice>. You can also hide it entirely by going to <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guisubmenu>Toolbar</guisubmenu></menuchoice>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Progress Bar</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The Progress Bar is located in the lower left corner of the
|
|
&app; window. It displays the progress of time consuming
|
|
operations, such as opening and saving large data bases,
|
|
importing and exporting to other formats, generating web
|
|
sites, etc. When you are not doing these types of operations,
|
|
the Progress Bar is blank.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Status Bar</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The Status Bar is located to the right of the Progress Bar,
|
|
on the very bottom of the &app; window. It displays
|
|
information about current &app; activity and contextual
|
|
information about the selected items. The behavior of the
|
|
Status Bar can be adjusted in the Preferences dialog, which
|
|
can be found by selecting
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu></menuchoice>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Display area</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The largest area in the center of the &app; window is the
|
|
display area. What it displays depends on the currently
|
|
selected View. We'll discuss Views in detail below.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-views">
|
|
<title>Views</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Genealogical information is very broad and can be extremely
|
|
detailed. Displaying it poses a challenge that GRAMPS takes on by
|
|
dividing and organizing the information into a series of
|
|
Views. Each View displays a portion of the total information,
|
|
selected according to a particular category. This will become
|
|
clearer as we explore the six different Views, listed
|
|
below:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem><para>People View</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Family View</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Pedigree View</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Sources View</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Places View</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Media View</para></listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Before we launch into a description of each View,
|
|
let's first explain how to switch between Views.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="view-modes">
|
|
<title>Switching Views and Viewing Modes</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>As mentioned above there are six different Views. In
|
|
addition, there are two different Viewing Modes. You can tell at
|
|
a glance which Viewing Mode you are in: If you see icons listed
|
|
vertically in a sidebar at the left of the window, you are in
|
|
the Sidebar Viewing Mode. If instead you see a series of
|
|
"notebook tabs" (labeled People, Family, Pedigree, Sources,
|
|
Places, Media) that run horizontally across the window, then you
|
|
are in the Tabbed Viewing Mode. You can switch from one Viewing
|
|
Mode to another by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sidebar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the Sidebar menu item.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you're in the Sidebar Viewing Mode, you can select the View
|
|
you want by clicking one of the sidebar icons.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="side-nofilt-fig">
|
|
<title>Sidebar Viewing Mode</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/mainwin.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="352" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows sidebar viewing mode.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you're in the Tabbed Viewing Mode, you can select the
|
|
View you want by clicking the corresponding notebook tab.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="noside-nofilt-fig">
|
|
<title>Tabbed Viewing Mode</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/noside-nofilt.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="393" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows tabbed viewing mode.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
<sect2 id="people-view">
|
|
<title>People View</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
When &app; first opens a database, it displays the
|
|
People View (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig"/> and <xref
|
|
linkend="noside-nofilt-fig"/>). This view lists
|
|
all the people stored in the database.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
You'll note that people are grouped according to their family
|
|
names. To the left of each family name is an arrow. Clicking it
|
|
once will reveal the entire list of people sharing that
|
|
name. Clicking the arrow again will "roll up" the
|
|
list and show only the family name.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
By default, the People View, displays the following columns:
|
|
<guilabel>Names</guilabel>, &app; <guilabel>ID</guilabel>
|
|
numbers, <guilabel>Gender</guilabel>, and their
|
|
<guilabel>Birth</guilabel> and <guilabel>Death
|
|
dates</guilabel>. You can add or remove columns to and from
|
|
the display by calling up the <guilabel>Column
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog
|
|
(<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Column
|
|
Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>) and checking or unchecking
|
|
the boxes listed. You can also change the position of a column
|
|
in People View by clicking and dragging it to a new position
|
|
in the Editor. Once you have made the changes you want, click
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to exit the Editor and see your
|
|
changes in the People View.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="columns-tip">
|
|
<title>Column Editor</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The Column Editor is available in all Views and works the
|
|
same way in each.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="column-editor-fig">
|
|
<title>Column Editor Dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/column-editor.png" format="PNG" width="444" depth="437"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows column editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="filters">
|
|
<title>Filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Genealogical databases can contain information on many people,
|
|
families, places, and objects. It's therefore possible for a
|
|
View to contain a long list of data that's difficult to
|
|
work with. &app; gives you a means for controlling this
|
|
condition by allowing you to filter a list to a more
|
|
manageable size.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="side-filt-fig">
|
|
<title>Filter Controls Displayed</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/side-filt.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="352" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows filter controls.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When &app; opens a database, no filtering is in effect. In
|
|
People View, for example, all people in the database are
|
|
listed by default. To filter the list, go to <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. This will place a new menu just above the list
|
|
of People. Click on the double arrows of this menu to get a
|
|
pop-up list of all the criteria by which you can filter the
|
|
People listed. Choose a filter (for example, "Males"
|
|
or "People with children") and click
|
|
<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="filter-note">
|
|
<title>Displaying the filter</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To reduce screen clutter, the filter menu is hidden by
|
|
default. To display it, go to the <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> menu. Please understand that even if the
|
|
filter menu is not displayed, filtering may still be in
|
|
effect. (Thus, we say that filtering is persistent.) If you
|
|
are unsure if your list is filtered, bring up the filter
|
|
menu (by going to <menuchoice> <guimenu>View</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>) and check
|
|
if any filtering is set.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tip id="filt-tip">
|
|
<title>Example filter use</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To show males only, choose the <guilabel>Males</guilabel>
|
|
filter, then click the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>
|
|
button. To cancel any filtering, set the filter to
|
|
<guilabel>Entire Database</guilabel> and then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="family-view">
|
|
<title>Family View</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The Family View displays the family information of a
|
|
selected person that we call the Active person. Specifically,
|
|
it shows his or her closest relationships.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="family-fig">
|
|
<title>Family View</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/family.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="352" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Family View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The Family View displays the following series of list boxes:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Active person</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Shows birth and death data for the individual you have
|
|
selected. Double-click inside the box to edit the Active
|
|
person's information. Click on the double arrow to the
|
|
right and the currently selected Spouse will become the
|
|
new Active person.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationship</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays birth and death data for the Active person's
|
|
Spouse(s).
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note id="spouse-info">
|
|
<title>Terminology</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
In the Family View, we use the term "spouse"
|
|
for sake of simplicity. However, please note that
|
|
"spouse" may in fact be a domestic partner, a
|
|
partner in a civil union, etc.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
Double-click a Spouse to edit his or her
|
|
relationship to the Active person. Shift-click (that is,
|
|
hold down the Shift key while you click) a Spouse to edit
|
|
his or her personal information. Click the icon to the
|
|
top right of the Relationship box to add a new person to
|
|
the database and to create a relationship between this
|
|
person and the Active person. Click the middle icon to
|
|
create a relationship between the Active person and
|
|
another person already stored in the database. Click the
|
|
minus (-) button to remove the relationship between the
|
|
currently selected Spouse and the Active person. (Note
|
|
that this does not remove the Spouse from the database.)
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Active person's parents</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> or
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons to add or remove parents
|
|
of the Active person. Click the right arrow button to make
|
|
the Father the new Active person and the Mother the new
|
|
Spouse.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Spouse's parents</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This list box functions the same as that of the Active
|
|
person's parents.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Children</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Displays the children of the Active person and the
|
|
currently selected Spouse. The list can be ordered however
|
|
you want by clicking on a column heading.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
Note that in addition to columns for Name, ID, Gender,
|
|
Birth Date, and Death Date, there is a column labeled
|
|
Status.1 This column reflects the relationship between the
|
|
child and his parents (Birth, Adoption, etc.).
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
As with the other list boxes, the Children list box has
|
|
some associated buttons. Click the left arrow button to
|
|
make the selected Child the Active person. Click the next
|
|
button down to add a new person to the database and to
|
|
make this person a Child of the Active person. Click the
|
|
next button down to select a person from the database and
|
|
to make this person a Child of the Active person. Click
|
|
the lowest button to remove the selected Child from the
|
|
Family (note that this does not remove the Child from the
|
|
database).
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="right-click-menu">
|
|
<title>Right Click Menu</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Most of the functions described above can also be executed
|
|
by right-clicking your mouse.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The layout of the Family View can be switched from the
|
|
"left-to-right" arrangement shown in <xref linkend="family-fig"/> to the
|
|
"top-to-bottom" arrangement shown in <xref linkend="family-alt-fig"/>. This is
|
|
done by going to
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
|
|
and selecting the <guilabel>Display</guilabel> section of
|
|
the dialog that appears.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="family-alt-fig">
|
|
<title>Alternative Family View</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/family-alt.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="352" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Alternative Family View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="pedigree-view">
|
|
<title>Pedigree View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Pedigree View displays a family tree of the Active
|
|
person's ancestors. The Pedigree View shows up to five
|
|
generations, depending on the size of the window. Each person is
|
|
indicated by a box labeled with his or her name. Two lines
|
|
branch from each box. The top one shows the person's father
|
|
and the bottom one the mother. Solid lines represent birth
|
|
relations, while dashed lines represent non-birth relations
|
|
such as adoption, step-parenthood, guardianship, etc.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-fig">
|
|
<title>Pedigree View</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="352" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Pedigree View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If you move your mouse over a box, it expands to show birth
|
|
and death dates. If you move your mouse over a line, the line
|
|
gets highlighted, indicating an active link. Double-click the
|
|
line to make the corresponding ancestor the Active
|
|
person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-child-cut-fig">
|
|
<title>Children Menu</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree-child-cut.png" format="PNG" width="303" depth="195"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Children Menu in Pedigree View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To the left of the Active person is a left arrow button. If
|
|
the Active person has children, clicking this button expands a
|
|
list of the Active person's children. Selecting one of the
|
|
children makes that child the pctive Person.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The appearance of the children's names in the menu
|
|
differentiates the "dead ends" of the tree from the
|
|
continuing branches. Children who have children themselves
|
|
appear in the menu in the boldface and italic type, while
|
|
children without children ("dead ends") appear in a
|
|
regular font. If the Active person has only one child, no menu
|
|
will be displayed (since there is only one choice) and the
|
|
child will become the Active person when the arrow button is
|
|
clicked.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The right-hand side of the window shows two right arrow
|
|
buttons. When the top button is clicked, the Father of the
|
|
Active person becomes the Active person. Clicking the bottom
|
|
button makes the Mother of the Active person the Active
|
|
person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-siblings-cut-fig">
|
|
<title>Personal Context Menu</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree-siblings-cut.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="253" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Context Menu in Pedigree View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Right-clicking on any person's box in the Pedigree View will
|
|
bring up the "context menu". Among other useful
|
|
items, the context menu has sub-menus listing
|
|
<guilabel>Spouses</guilabel>, <guilabel>Siblings</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Children</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Parents</guilabel> of that
|
|
person. "Greyed-out" sub-menus indicate the absence
|
|
of the data in the appropriate category. Similarly to the
|
|
children menu above, Childrens' and Parents' menus distinguish
|
|
continuing lines from dead ends.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-anchor-fig">
|
|
<title>Pedigree View with the Anchor</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree-anchor.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="353" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Pedigree View with the anchor set.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Pedigree View gives you an additional, advanced way of
|
|
labeling generations. This feature becomes available by
|
|
setting the "anchor" on a selected person. If the
|
|
anchor is set, the generations are labeled as follows:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The Anchor Person (and his/her generation) is labeled as
|
|
<guilabel>0</guilabel>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The ancestor generations are numbered with positive integers
|
|
(<guilabel>1</guilabel>,<guilabel>2</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>3</guilabel>,etc.).
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The descendant generations are numbered with negative integers
|
|
(<guilabel>-1</guilabel>,<guilabel>-2</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>-3</guilabel>, etc.).
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
In all cases, the number represents the number of
|
|
generations between the labeled generation and the anchor
|
|
person. In this mode, you can travel along the extensive
|
|
pedigree line and see the number of generations removed
|
|
from the Anchor Person.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To set the anchor, select the person you want as the Active
|
|
person (recall that you can do so in the Pedigree View by
|
|
clicking the line that leads to the person from his or her
|
|
child). Then, while in Pedigree View, right click anywhere in
|
|
the main window. A context menu will appear. Select
|
|
<guilabel>Set anchor</guilabel> and you will see the Active
|
|
person indicated as the anchor in the lower left corner.
|
|
This newly established Anchor Person will remain in effect
|
|
until you right-click again and select <guilabel>Remove
|
|
anchor</guilabel> from the context menu or until a new Active
|
|
person is chosen who is unrelated to the Anchor Person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="sources-view">
|
|
<title>Sources View</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Sources View lists the sources of certain information stored
|
|
in the database. These can include various documents (birth,
|
|
death, and marriage certificates, etc.), books, films,
|
|
journals, private diaries, - nearly anything that can
|
|
provide genealogical evidence. GRAMPS gives you the option
|
|
to provide a source for each event you record (births,
|
|
deaths, marriages, etc.). The Source View lists the
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Author</guilabel> of the source, as well as any
|
|
<guilabel>Publication</guilabel> information that may be
|
|
associated with it.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The list of Sources can be sorted in the usual manner, by
|
|
clicking on a column heading. Clicking once sorts in
|
|
ascending order, clicking again sorts in descending
|
|
order. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog can be
|
|
used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="sources-fig">
|
|
<title>Sources View</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/sources.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="353" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Sources View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="places-view">
|
|
<title>Places View</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Places View lists the geographical places in which the
|
|
events of the database took place. These could be places of
|
|
birth, death, and marriages of people, as well as their
|
|
home, employment, education addresses, or any other
|
|
conceivable reference to the geographical location. The
|
|
Places View lists the places' <guilabel>Name</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church Parish</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>City</guilabel>, <guilabel>County</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>State</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Country</guilabel>. All of these columns can be
|
|
used for sorting by the usual sorting rules. The
|
|
<guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to
|
|
add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="places-fig">
|
|
<title>Places View</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/places.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="353" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Places View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="media-view">
|
|
<title>Media View</title>
|
|
<figure id="media-fig">
|
|
<title>Media View</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/media.png" format="PNG" width="500" depth="353" scale="75"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Media View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Media View is a list of Media Objects used in the
|
|
database. Media Objects are any files that relate somehow
|
|
to the stored genealogical data. Technically, any file can
|
|
be stored as a Media Object. Most frequently, these are
|
|
images, audio files, animation files, etc. The list box on
|
|
the bottom lists the <guilabel>Name</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Path</guilabel> of the Media Object. The
|
|
<guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to
|
|
rearrange the displayed columns, which obey usual sorting
|
|
rules. The top part of the GRAMPS window shows a preview (if
|
|
available) and information about the Media Object.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-usage">
|
|
<title>Usage</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Now we turn to a detailed exploration of the day-to-day use of
|
|
GRAMPS. First, we should point out that GRAMPS often offers more
|
|
than one way to do the same task. We'll try to point out some of
|
|
these alternatives where appropriate.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="new-db">
|
|
<title>Starting a New Database</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To start a new database, choose
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. You will then be asked to give the new database a name.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="new-db-notdir-note">
|
|
<title>&app; databases</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
&app; stores your data in a Berkeley database, sometimes
|
|
known as BSDDB. These files have ".grdb" as
|
|
their default extension. The extension is automatically
|
|
added to your filename.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="open-db">
|
|
<title>Opening a Database</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To open a database, either choose
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> or click the
|
|
<guibutton>Open</guibutton> button on the Toolbar. The
|
|
<guilabel>Open database</guilabel> dialog will appear and you'll
|
|
see a list of files. If you don't see the file you're looking
|
|
for, make sure the All files filter is selected. (This dialog
|
|
has a "filetype" filter, meaning it may only be
|
|
showing files that have a certain extension.)
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
To open a recently accessed database, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open Recent</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> and select the filename from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
If you do not have "write permissions" for the
|
|
selected database, it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In
|
|
this mode, the data may be viewed, but no changes will be made
|
|
to the database. To indicate this mode, the title of the main
|
|
window will be appended with <guilabel>(Read Only)</guilabel>
|
|
text.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
GRAMPS allows you to open certain databases that have not been
|
|
saved in GRAMPS' own file format. These include XML and GEDCOM
|
|
databases. But you should be aware that if the XML or GEDCOM
|
|
database is relatively large, you may encounter some performance
|
|
problems. These can be avoided by creating a new GRAMPS database
|
|
and importing your XML/GEDCOM data into it.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="open-db-note2">
|
|
<title>Opening XML and GEDCOM databases</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
XML and GEDCOM databases require all data to be held in
|
|
memory. GRAMPS' native grdb format does not. Thus, a database
|
|
with a grdb format can access data quicker and more efficiently.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<warning id="open-db-warn">
|
|
<title>GEDCOM Editing</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may
|
|
be lost during import into &app;. Simply opening and viewing
|
|
the file will not change it. However, if any changes were
|
|
made and they were not abandoned upon exit, exiting &app; will
|
|
save the data, with possible data loss.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="save-db">
|
|
<title>Saving Changes to Your Database</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
GRAMPS saves your changes as soon as you apply them. This means,
|
|
for example, that any time you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
|
|
when using GRAMPS, your changes are immediately recorded and
|
|
saved. There is no separate "save" command (although
|
|
there is a "save as" command that we'll discuss later.)
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
You can undo changes you've made by selecting
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. If you select this
|
|
command repeatedly, your most recent changes will be undone one at
|
|
a time.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
If you want to return your database to the way it was when you
|
|
opened it, select
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Abandon changes
|
|
and quit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. (This is just like quitting
|
|
without saving in other programs.)
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
If you would like to save your database under a different name,
|
|
you can do so by choosing <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Save as...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and specifying
|
|
the name (and, optionally, the format) of your new database. Note
|
|
that "Save as" will allow you to continue editing the
|
|
newly saved database. If this is not what you want to do, you may
|
|
wish to use the "Export" command instead.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="import-data">
|
|
<title>Importing Data</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Importing allows you to bring data from other genealogy programs
|
|
into a &app; database. Currently, &app; can import data from the
|
|
following formats:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Another &app; database (having the "grdb" file
|
|
extension),
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GEDCOM</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>&app; XML</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>&app; package</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GeneWeb</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<note id="import-note">
|
|
<title>Importing vs. opening</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Please recognize that importing a database is different from
|
|
opening a database. When you import, you are actually bringing
|
|
data from one database into a GRAMPS database. When you open a
|
|
file, you are editing your original file.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To import data, select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu></menuchoice>. The <guilabel>Import
|
|
database</guilabel> dialog will open, asking you to specify the
|
|
file you wish to import.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<warning id="import-dataloss">
|
|
<title>Data loss with some formats</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
It is important to note that the importing process is not
|
|
perfect for GEDCOM and GeneWeb databases. There is a chance
|
|
that some of the data in these databases will not be imported
|
|
into &app;.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The &app; database (grdb), &app; XML, and &app; package are all
|
|
native &app; formats. There is no risk of information loss
|
|
when import or exporting to these formats.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>&app; database (grdb)</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The native &app; database format is a specific form of
|
|
Berkeley database (BSDDB) with a special structure of data
|
|
tables. This format is binary and
|
|
architecture-dependent. It is very quick and efficient,
|
|
but not generally portable across computers with
|
|
different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha).
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>&app; XML</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The &app; XML file was the default format for
|
|
older versions of &app;. Unlike the grdb
|
|
format, it is architecture independent and
|
|
human-readable. The database may also have references to
|
|
non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is not
|
|
guaranteed to be completely portable. The &app; XML
|
|
database is created by saving (
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
) or exporting (
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
) data in that format
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>&app; package</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The &app; package is a compressed archive containing the &app;
|
|
XML file and all media objects (images, sound files,
|
|
etc.) to which the database refers. Because it contains all
|
|
the media objects, this format is completely portable.
|
|
The &app; package is created by exporting (
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
) data in that format.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If you import information from another GRAMPS database or GRAMPS
|
|
XML database, you will see the progress of the operation in the
|
|
progress bar of GRAMPS' main window.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
If you import a GEDCOM database, you will see the import dialog
|
|
shown in <xref linkend="gedcom-import-fig"/>. The information in
|
|
the dialog is updated as the import progresses.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="gedcom-import-fig">
|
|
<title>GEDCOM Import</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/gedcom-import.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="510" depth="490"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows GEDCOM Import Window.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a media file is not found during import, you'll be prompted
|
|
to take one of the actions indicated in <xref
|
|
linkend="missing-media-im"/>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="missing-media-im">
|
|
<title>Missing Media dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/missing-media.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="493" depth="264"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Missing Media dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you don't have the missing file and have no possibility of
|
|
replacing it, click the <guibutton>Remove Object</guibutton>
|
|
button. This will remove the object that corresponds to the
|
|
missing file as well as all the references in the database to
|
|
that object.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you're not sure where the missing file is, but think you
|
|
still have it or may be able to find it, click the
|
|
<guibutton>Keep Reference</guibutton> button. If and when you
|
|
find the file, you can simply copy it into your database
|
|
directory and have access to it through &app;.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you can supply the missing file during the import
|
|
operation, click the <guibutton>Select File</guibutton>
|
|
button. This will copy the file you select in place of the
|
|
missing file. No references will be altered in the database.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To automatically use the selection made in this dialog for
|
|
all missing media files, check the <guilabel>Use this
|
|
selection for all missing media files</guilabel> box. This
|
|
will remember your choice and use it for all media files
|
|
missing during this import, so that no further dialogs will
|
|
be presented. Use this option if you anticipate many missing
|
|
files and want to deal with all of them in the same manner.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="export-data">
|
|
<title>Exporting Data</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Exporting allows you to share any portion of your &app; database
|
|
with other researchers as well as to enable you to transfer your
|
|
data to another computer. Currently, &app; can export data to
|
|
the following formats: &app; database (grdb), &app; XML, GEDCOM,
|
|
&app; package, Web Family Tree, and GeneWeb.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="export-note">
|
|
<title>Export is saving a copy</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
When you export, you are saving a copy of the currently opened
|
|
database. Exporting creates another file with a copy of your
|
|
data. Note that the database that remains opened in your GRAMPS
|
|
window is NOT the file saved by your export. Additional editing
|
|
of the currently opened database will not alter the copy
|
|
produced by the export.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
To export data, choose <menuchoice> <guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. This will
|
|
bring up the <guilabel>Export</guilabel> assistant. Its pages
|
|
will guide you through the format selection (see <xref
|
|
linkend="export-druid-fig"/>), file selection, and format
|
|
specific export options (see <xref
|
|
linkend="gedcom-export-fig"/>). After a final confirmation
|
|
page, the export will be performed according to the choices you
|
|
have made. At any time, you can click the
|
|
<guibutton>Back</guibutton> and revise any selection, and then
|
|
go forward to redo the export.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="export-druid-fig">
|
|
<title>Export assistant: format selection</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/export-druid.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="383"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows format selection page of an Export assistant</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
<sect2 id="export-gedcom">
|
|
<title>Exporting into the GEDCOM format</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
&app; allows you to export a database into the common GEDCOM
|
|
format. It provides options that allow you to fine tune your
|
|
export (see <xref linkend="gedcom-export-fig"/>).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Encoding</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Since different languages use different characters, it is
|
|
important to tell a GEDCOM file what character set is used.
|
|
The two formats traditionally accepted are ASCII and ANSEL.
|
|
Since all ASCII characters are valid ANSEL characters,
|
|
GRAMPS does not provide an option for ASCII.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Because ANSEL is not commonly used, some genealogy programs
|
|
will accept ANSI (more commonly know as ISO-8859-1) and
|
|
Unicode character sets. Only select ANSI or Unicode if you
|
|
know any program that attempts to read the GEDCOM file will
|
|
understand these character sets.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Filter</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The filter allows you to export a limited amount of data,
|
|
based on the criteria you select.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Target</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
While GEDCOM is a standard, not every program implements
|
|
it in the same way. This can lead to data loss. &app; can
|
|
reduce the data loss in some cases. You can tell &app;
|
|
what program is the target, and &app; will customize the
|
|
exported file for that program. If your program is not
|
|
listed, choose the "GEDCOM 5.5 Standard".
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Copyright</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Allows you to select a statement to describe your Copyright
|
|
claim.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>No not include records marked private</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Check this box to prevent private records from being
|
|
included in the exported file.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Restrict data on living people</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Check this box to limit the information exported for living
|
|
people. This means that all information concerning their
|
|
birth, death, addresses, significant events, etc., will be
|
|
omitted in the exported GEDCOM file. If you choose this
|
|
option, you will be given additional options to limit
|
|
further the data on living people. For example, you can
|
|
choose to substitute the word "Living" for the
|
|
first name; you can exclude notes; and you can exclude
|
|
sources for living people.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Sometimes, it is not always obvious from the data if someone
|
|
is actually alive. &app; uses an advanced algorithm to try
|
|
to determine if a person could still be alive. Remember,
|
|
&app; is making its best guess, and it may not always be
|
|
able to guess correctly all the time. Please double check
|
|
your data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Reference images from path</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Check this box to tell GRAMPS to use the specific path for
|
|
your images when writing image references in GEDCOM.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This option allows specify where your image files are
|
|
located. This is useful when you are transfering your GEDCOM
|
|
file from one computer to another. It tells the program
|
|
that is importing the data where your images are.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<figure id="gedcom-export-fig">
|
|
<title>Export assistant: GEDCOM options</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/gedcom-export.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="481"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-gramps-formats">
|
|
<title>Export into &app; formats</title>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>&app; database (grdb) export</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting to the &app; native format will simply make a
|
|
copy of your data under another name. Exporting to this
|
|
format can also be useful if you have directly opened
|
|
an XML or GEDCOM file and would like to save it as the
|
|
grdb file.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>&app; XML database export</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting into &app; XML format will produce a database
|
|
compatible with the previous versions of &app;. As XML
|
|
is a text-based human-readable format, you may also use
|
|
it to take a look at your data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>&app; package export</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting to the &app; package format will create a
|
|
compressed file that contains the database and copies of
|
|
all associated media files. This is useful if you want to
|
|
move your database to another computer or to share it with
|
|
someone.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Export to CD</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of
|
|
all media object files for recording onto a CD. To
|
|
actually burn the CD, you will need to go to the GNOME
|
|
<guilabel>burn:///</guilabel> location, which can be
|
|
accessed by navigating through Nautilus: After exporting
|
|
to CD, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>CD Creator</guisubmenu></menuchoice> in the
|
|
Nautilus menu. Your database directory will show up. To
|
|
burn it to the CD, click the CD icon on the Nautilus
|
|
toolbar, or select
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Write to
|
|
CD</guisubmenu></menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a media file is not found during export, you will see the
|
|
same <guilabel>Missing Media</guilabel> dialog you encounter
|
|
with GEDCOM export.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-other-formats">
|
|
<title>Export into other formats</title>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Web Family Tree</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting to Web Family Tree will create a text file
|
|
that can be used by the Web Family Tree program.
|
|
Export options include filter selection and the ability
|
|
to limit data on living people to that of their family
|
|
ties.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GeneWeb</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into
|
|
a popular web genealogy format. To find out more about
|
|
GeneWeb and its format, visit
|
|
<ulink url="http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/"
|
|
type="http">http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/</ulink>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>vCalendar and vCard</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in
|
|
a format used in many calendaring and addressbook
|
|
applications, sometimes called PIM for Personal
|
|
Information Manager.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-edit-quick">
|
|
<title>Entering and Editing Data: Quick Start Overview</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This section is designed to give you the basic knowledge necessary
|
|
to start putting your genealogical information into &app;. It
|
|
will explain how to enter people into the database and how to
|
|
specify their family relationships. (A more detailed explanation
|
|
will follow in the section entitled <xref
|
|
linkend="gramps-edit-complete"/>.)
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
First, let's identify the types of information you can enter into
|
|
your GRAMPS database. These include:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Personal information about an individual (names, addresses,
|
|
birth and death dates, etc.)
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Information about an individual's relationships (marriages,
|
|
divorces, civil unions, etc.)
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Information about an individual's parents and children
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Sources that document your research
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<note id="keybind">
|
|
<title>Keybindings</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
In addition to interacting with GRAMPS through menu items and
|
|
buttons, you can use its extensive set of
|
|
"keybindings." For more information, see <xref
|
|
linkend="append-keybind"/>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
Now let's take a quick look at how you can enter and edit these
|
|
various types of information.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-add-pers">
|
|
<title>To Add or Edit a Person</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To add a person to the database, switch to the People View
|
|
(<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig"/>) and then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> on the toolbar. Enter any data you
|
|
know about this person into the <guilabel>Edit
|
|
Person</guilabel> dialog (see <xref linkend="edit-pers-fig"/>
|
|
for details).
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
To edit information about a person already
|
|
present in the database, select the person from the People View
|
|
and click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
button on the toolbar.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="person-menu">
|
|
<title>Alternate ways of adding or editing a person</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
You can also use <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> menu items available under
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>. Or you can right-click on the
|
|
person and select <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> or
|
|
<guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> from the context menu that pops
|
|
up.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-rel">
|
|
<title>To Specify a Relationship</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To specify a relationship, select the person for whom the
|
|
relationship applies. Switch to the Family View
|
|
(<xref linkend="family-fig"/>) and you'll see this individual
|
|
indicated as the "Active person".
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
Now a question: Does the person who will form the relationship
|
|
with the Active person already exist in the database? If yes,
|
|
click the middle button to the right of the Spouse box. You'll
|
|
then be able to browse through the list of people in the
|
|
database to select the one you want. If not, click the topmost
|
|
button to the right of the Spouse box. This will allow you to
|
|
add a new person to the database and to specify the
|
|
relationship this person has to the Active person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="spouse-filter">
|
|
<title>Filtering</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
By default, GRAMPS filters the displayed list to show only
|
|
those people who could theoretically have a relationship with
|
|
the Active Person. That is, GRAMPS only shows those people
|
|
whose birth dates and death dates fit within the lifetime of
|
|
the Active Person. If you wish, you can add a person to the
|
|
list by clicking the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button. To
|
|
completely override the filter and display all people from the
|
|
database, check the <guilabel>Show all</guilabel> box.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
To edit an existing relationship, double-click in the Spouse
|
|
box. If there is more than one relationship in the list, you can
|
|
select the spouse or partner you want from the list before
|
|
double-clicking.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="spouse-alt-edit">
|
|
<title>Alternate ways of editing relationships.</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Most of the functions described above are also available in
|
|
the context menu that pops up when you right-click.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-par">
|
|
<title>To Specify Parents</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To specify the parents for a person, highlight that individual
|
|
in the People View and then switch to the Family View (<xref
|
|
linkend="family-fig"/>). Your selected person will be
|
|
indicated as the Active person. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to the right of the
|
|
<guilabel>Active person's parents</guilabel> list box. This
|
|
will bring up the <guilabel>Choose Parents</guilabel>
|
|
dialog. You will see three sections, one for father, one for
|
|
mother, and one for specifying the relationships between
|
|
everyone.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
If the father and mother of the Active person are already stored
|
|
in your database, you can scroll through the lists and make your
|
|
selections. If they are not in the database, you can click
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> to add them.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note id="parent-filter">
|
|
<title>Filtering</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
By default, GRAMPS will limit both lists to people who could
|
|
possibly be the parents (judged by the date of birth) of the
|
|
Active person. To override this, check the Show all box for
|
|
each list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
To specify parents of the Active person's spouse, switch to
|
|
Family View and then click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button
|
|
to the right of the Spouse's parents list box.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
To edit information about parents who are already present in the
|
|
database, move the mouse over the corresponding parents' box and
|
|
double-click.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="parents-alt-menu">
|
|
<title>Alternate ways of specifying parents</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
These functions can also be performed by right-clicking on the
|
|
parents' box and using the context menu that pops up.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-ch">
|
|
<title>To Specify Children</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To specify children of an Active person, switch to the Family
|
|
View (<xref linkend="family-fig"/>) and then click either the
|
|
second or the third button from the top right of the
|
|
children list box. The second button adds a child to the
|
|
database and to the family, while the third button adds a
|
|
child to the family who is already present in the database.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If using the third button, select a child from the list and
|
|
specify the child's relationship with father and mother using
|
|
menus at the bottom. If you want, you can add a person to the
|
|
list by clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. By
|
|
default, &app; will limit the lists to people who could
|
|
possibly be the child (judged by the date of birth) of the
|
|
active person. To override this, check the <guilabel>Show
|
|
all</guilabel> box.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The relationship of the child to the parents can be modified by
|
|
right-clicking in the children's box and using the context menu
|
|
that pops up. Again, most of the above functions are available
|
|
through this context menu.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-add-img">
|
|
<title>Adding Photos and Other Media Objects</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
You can add photos and other media objects to individual people,
|
|
events, sources, and places. You can also add images that might
|
|
not be limited to a single person or event (for example, group
|
|
family photos).
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
If you want to add an image to a single person, switch to the
|
|
People View (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig"/>), select a
|
|
person, and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on
|
|
the toolbar. This will bring up the <guilabel>Edit
|
|
Person</guilabel> dialog (<xref
|
|
linkend="edit-pers-fig"/>). Next, select the
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab, and click the
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to call up the <guilabel>Select
|
|
a media object</guilabel> dialog. Type a filename or browse to
|
|
find the image file you want and then provide a title for that
|
|
image. Keep adding images until you are done.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
To add images related to a relationship (for example, a
|
|
marriage), switch to the Family View (<xref
|
|
linkend="family-fig"/>) and double-click on the Spouse box. This
|
|
calls up the <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship editor</guilabel>
|
|
dialog. Select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click
|
|
the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to
|
|
the Source View (<xref linkend="sources-fig"/>) or Place View
|
|
(<xref linkend="places-fig"/>). Select the source or place you
|
|
want and then either double-click on it or click the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. Select the
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click the
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
Finally, to add images that you want to include in the database,
|
|
but hare are not limited to any particular person, relationship,
|
|
source or place, switch to the Media View (<xref
|
|
linkend="media-fig"/>). Then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add an
|
|
image. If you have already added any images to any individual
|
|
galleries, you will also find them listed in the Media View.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="alt-add-image">
|
|
<title>Alternate way of adding images to galleries</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
An image can always be added to any gallery by using
|
|
drag-and-drop. Items can be dragged from the Media View, any
|
|
gallery, the desktop, the file manager or a web browser and
|
|
dropped on the target gallery, adding the image to the
|
|
gallery.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
In any gallery, you can also use the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> to edit image information and the
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> button and to remove the image
|
|
reference from that gallery.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="remove-image-from-gallery">
|
|
<title>Removing an image from a gallery</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Removing a media object from a gallery does not remove the
|
|
image from the database. To completely remove the image from
|
|
the database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it
|
|
and then clicking the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> icon on
|
|
the toolbar.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-edit-src-plc">
|
|
<title>To Edit Sources and Places</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To add a source or a place to the database, switch to the
|
|
appropriate Source View (<xref linkend="sources-fig"/>) or
|
|
Place View (<xref linkend="places-fig"/>). Then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add a
|
|
source/place. Enter the information into the <guilabel>Source
|
|
Editor</guilabel> (or <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>)
|
|
dialog.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To edit information about sources and places already present
|
|
in the database, switch to the appropriate view, select an
|
|
entry you would like to view/modify, and then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
toolbar. Alternatively, you may double-click on the entry to
|
|
edit it.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-edit-complete">
|
|
<title>Enterng and Editing Data: Complete Description</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The previous section offered you a quick overview of how to enter
|
|
and edit data in GRAMPS. This section continues that discussion in
|
|
much greater detail.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
As we have seen above, GRAMPS offers you a series of Views. Each
|
|
of these Views gives you opportunities to enter and edit
|
|
information. In fact, you can often get to the same information
|
|
from different Views.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
In GRAMPS, information is entered and edited through what we call
|
|
dialogs. Since we use that term frequently, we should define what
|
|
we mean by it:
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
A dialog is a pop-up window that provides one or more forms for
|
|
entering and editing data that fits a certain category. Examples
|
|
in GRAMPS include the Edit Person dialog and the
|
|
Marriage/Relationship dialog, among many others.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
A dialog often includes a series of "notebook tabs" that
|
|
group the information into subcategories. For example, the Edit
|
|
Person dialog has notebook tabs for subcategories such as Events,
|
|
Attributes, Addresses, and Notes, among others.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="edit-button-note">
|
|
<title>Add, Remove, and Edit buttons</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
In most cases, GRAMPS uses a <guibutton>+</guibutton> to
|
|
correspond to <guibutton>Add</guibutton>, a
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> correspond to
|
|
<guibutton>Remove</guibutton>, and an icon of a pen on a sheet
|
|
of paper to denote <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>. We will continue
|
|
referring to the latter as the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
button, while using <guibutton>+</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> to denote the two former buttons.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-pers">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About People</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Information about people is entered and edited through the
|
|
<guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog. This dialog can be
|
|
invoked from different Views in the following ways:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the People View:</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Double-click the name of the person whose data you would
|
|
like to edit
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Select the name by single click and
|
|
then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the
|
|
toolbar.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Select the name and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Select <guimenuitem>Edit...</guimenuitem> from the
|
|
<guisubmenu>Edit</guisubmenu> menu of &app;
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Select <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem> from the context menu
|
|
that appears upon right-click on the name.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the Family View:</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To edit active person's data, move the mouse into the
|
|
<guilabel>Active person</guilabel> box.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
To edit Spouse's data, shift-click the
|
|
<guilabel>Spouse</guilabel> entry.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
From the <guilabel>Spouse</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Children</guilabel> boxes you can select the
|
|
desired person, right-click, and use the context menu
|
|
that pops up.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the Pedigree View:</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Double-click in the box having the name of the person
|
|
whose data you want to edit.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
In each of the above cases, the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
|
|
dialog will appear:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="413"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the name of the person whose data is
|
|
being edited. Below this name are ten "notebook tabs"
|
|
containing different categories of available information. Click
|
|
any tab to view and edit its contents. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom will apply all
|
|
the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will
|
|
close the window without applying any changes. If any data in
|
|
any tabs were modified, an alert window will appear, prompting
|
|
you to choose from the following options: close the dialog
|
|
without saving changes, cancel the initial cancel request, or
|
|
save the changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database. There is no need for a Save
|
|
operation, since all changes are immediate.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The tabs reflect the following categories of personal data:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab contains general
|
|
information about the person. This includes
|
|
<guilabel>Given name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family
|
|
name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family prefix</guilabel> (such
|
|
as "de" or "van"),
|
|
<guilabel>Suffix</guilabel> (e.g. Jr. or III),
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel> (e.g. Dr. or Rev.),
|
|
<guilabel>Nickname</guilabel> (Bob for Robert),
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel> of the name (birth name, married
|
|
name, etc.) and <guilabel>Date</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Place</guilabel> of birth and death. Some of
|
|
these (<guilabel>Family name</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and both
|
|
<guilabel>Place</guilabel> fields), also provide
|
|
"autocompletion" feature: as you type in these
|
|
fields, a menu appears below the field containing database
|
|
entries that match your
|
|
partial input. This gives you a shortcut by letting you
|
|
select an entry that already exists in the database rather
|
|
than having to type it all out. You can select the entry
|
|
using your mouse or using your arrow and
|
|
<keycap>Enter</keycap> keys.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> (that is, the "pen and
|
|
paper" icon) next to the <guilabel>Family
|
|
name</guilabel> entry field invokes the <guilabel>Name
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog allows editing the
|
|
preferred name in full detail (see <xref
|
|
linkend="adv-an"/>).
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Gender</guilabel> radio buttons offer the
|
|
choice of person's gender : <guilabel>male</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>female</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>unknown</guilabel>.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
Clicking the colored "LED" buttons located next
|
|
to the birth and death Date fields will bring up the
|
|
<guilabel>Date Selection</guilabel> dialog allowing
|
|
detailed modification of the date, see <xref
|
|
linkend="adv-dates"/>. Clicking either the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button located next to the
|
|
birth and death LED buttons will bring up a dialog
|
|
allowing you to edit the birth or death details (see <xref
|
|
linkend="adv-ev"/>).
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The field <guilabel>ID</guilabel> displays the &app; ID
|
|
number which identifies the user in the database. This value
|
|
helps you distiguish between people who have the same name.
|
|
You may enter any unique value you want. If you do not provide
|
|
a value, &app; will automatically select a value for you.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area shows the first image
|
|
available in the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> of this
|
|
person (if any exist).
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
Finally, the <guilabel>Information is complete</guilabel>
|
|
and <guilabel>Information is private</guilabel> check
|
|
buttons let you mark whether or not the person's record is
|
|
complete and whether or not the record is private.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Names</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Names</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
any alternate names the person may have. The bottom part
|
|
of the window lists all alternate names for the person
|
|
stored in the database. The top part shows the details of
|
|
the currently selected name in the list (if any). The
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
allow the addition, modification, and removal of an
|
|
alternate name from the database. Note that the Edit and -
|
|
buttons become available only when an alternate name is
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-names-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Names</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-names.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="252"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When you add a new name or edit an existing name, the <guilabel>Name
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog is invoked. This dialog is described in the
|
|
section below (see <xref linkend="adv-an"/>).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Events</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
any events relevant to the person. The bottom part of the
|
|
window lists all such events stored in the database. The
|
|
top part shows the details of the currently selected event
|
|
in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to add, modify, and
|
|
remove an event record from the database. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when an event is selected
|
|
from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-events-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Events</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-events.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="278"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Events Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Attributes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
assign attributes to the person. You have complete freedom
|
|
to define and use attributes. For example, attributes
|
|
might be assigned to describe the person's physical
|
|
characteristics or personality traits.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
Note that each attribute listed in the
|
|
<guilabel>Attribute</guilabel> dialog consists of two
|
|
parts: the Attribute itself and a Value associated with
|
|
that Attribute. This so-called "Parameter-Value" pairing
|
|
can help you organize and systematize your research. For
|
|
example, if you define "Hair color" as an
|
|
Attribute for a person, "Hair Color" will become
|
|
a selectable Attribute for all other people. The Value of
|
|
Hair Color for person A might be red, and brown for person
|
|
B. In similar fashion, you might define an Attribute like
|
|
"Generosity" and use the Value of
|
|
"Enormous" to describe a particularly generous
|
|
person.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
The bottom part of the dialog window displays the list of
|
|
all Attributes stored in the database. The top part shows
|
|
the details of the currently selected attribute in the
|
|
list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add, modify, and remove an attribute record from
|
|
the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when an attribute is selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-attributes-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Attributes</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-attributes.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="231" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Addresses</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Addresses</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
record the various addresses of the person. The bottom
|
|
part of the window lists all addresses stored in the
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the currently
|
|
selected address in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
|
|
modify, and remove an address record from the
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when an address is selected from the list.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
Some reports allow you to restrict data on living
|
|
people. In particular, that option will omit their
|
|
addresses.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-addresses-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Addresses</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-addresses.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="272" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Notes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-notes-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Notes</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-notes.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="228"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record various items about the person that do not fit
|
|
neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify
|
|
existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the
|
|
way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you
|
|
select "Flowed," the text generated will have single
|
|
spaces put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and
|
|
single end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted
|
|
between two blocks of text will signal a new paragraph;
|
|
additional inserted lines will be ignored.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
|
|
and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the
|
|
Notes dialog.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-sources-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Sources</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-sources.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="147"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab allows you to view
|
|
and document the sources for the information you
|
|
collect. These might be general sources that do not
|
|
describe a specific event, but which nevertheless yield
|
|
information about the person. For example, if Aunt
|
|
Martha's memoirs mention her great-grandson Paul, the
|
|
researcher may assume that this Paul actually existed and
|
|
cite Aunt Martha's memoirs as the source that justifies
|
|
this assumption.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Sources which document specific events are best
|
|
recorded as sources of the event (under the
|
|
<guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab) instead of as a source
|
|
of the person. The person's
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab is best used for
|
|
any sources not specificly connected to any other data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The central part displays the list of all source
|
|
references stored in the database in relation to the
|
|
person. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
person. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
store photos, videos, and other media objects that are
|
|
associated with the person. The central part of the window
|
|
lists all such media objects. Any object in the form of a
|
|
valid image file will result in the display of a thumbnail
|
|
view of the image. For other objects such as audio files,
|
|
movie files, etc., a corresponding file type icon is
|
|
displayed instead.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The first available image in the gallery will be also
|
|
displayed in the <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area in
|
|
the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add a new image to the database, link to an image
|
|
already stored in the database, modify an image, and
|
|
remove a given media object from the person's gallery.
|
|
Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a media object is selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-gallery-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Gallery</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-gallery.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="182"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Removing a media object from a person's gallery does
|
|
not remove it from the database. It only removes the
|
|
reference to that object from this person's record.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Internet</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab displays Internet
|
|
addresses relevant to the person. The bottom part lists all
|
|
such Internet addresses and accompanying descriptions. The
|
|
top part shows the details of the currently selected
|
|
addresses in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove an
|
|
Internet address. The "Go" button (represented by
|
|
an icon having a green arrow and yellow circle) opens your
|
|
web browser and takes you directly to the highlighted
|
|
page. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when an address is selected
|
|
from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-internet-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Internet</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-internet.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="218"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>LDS</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab lets
|
|
you view and edit information about LDS ordinances of the
|
|
person. These are LDS Baptism, Endowment, and Sealed to
|
|
Parents ordinances, as labeled inside the tab. Each
|
|
ordinance is described by its date, LDS temple, and Place
|
|
where it happened. An additional pop-up menu,
|
|
"Parents," is available for the Sealed to
|
|
Parents ordinance. Each ordinance can be further described
|
|
through the selections available in the Status pop-up
|
|
menu. It can also be include notes and references to
|
|
sources through the corresponding
|
|
<guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-lds-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - LDS</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-lds.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="500" depth="403"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-dates">
|
|
<title>Editing Dates</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This section describes how to enter and modify dates. Since
|
|
dates are so important in genealogical research, GRAMPS takes
|
|
special care to preserve and use any date information available.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
Information can be entered into a date field by directly typing
|
|
it or by invoking the Date selection dialog. Both methods will
|
|
be discussed below, but first, we will cover some important
|
|
features of dates as they are used in GRAMPS.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-types">
|
|
<title>Date types</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Dates in GRAMPS are classified according to the following types:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Regular</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
A "regular" date is one which includes a specific
|
|
day, date, or month. It can be complete (e.g., June 6, 1990)
|
|
or partial (e.g., July 1977).
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Before</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
A "before" date is one that can only be identified
|
|
as occurring before a certain day, month, or year.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>After</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
An "after" date is one that occurs after a certain
|
|
day, month, or year.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Range</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
A "range" describes a time period during which the
|
|
event occurred. For example, "between January 1932 and
|
|
March 1932."
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Span</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
A "span" describes a time period during which a
|
|
condition existed. For example, "from May 12, 2000 to
|
|
February 2, 2002."
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-parsing">
|
|
<title>Date formats and parsing rules</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
GRAMPS recognizes dates entered in a variety of formats. The
|
|
default numeric format is that which is conventional for the
|
|
environment is which GRAMPS is operating; that is, DD.MM.YYYY
|
|
for most European countries, MM/DD/YYYY for the U.S., and so
|
|
on.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Besides exact dates, &app; recognizes many dates that are
|
|
not regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also
|
|
understands the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally,
|
|
it supports partial dates and many alternative calendars.
|
|
Below is the list of date entry rules to allow precise date
|
|
parsing.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<title>Date parsing rules</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The list only applys to the English version of GRAMPS. If
|
|
you are using localized version of &app;, your version may
|
|
or may not provide a localized date parser. At the time
|
|
of this writing, localized parsers exist for French, German,
|
|
Russian, Finnish, Dutch and Spanish languages.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If the localized parser is available for your version,
|
|
chances are that other rules are in effect. If there is no
|
|
manual in your language yet, you may try following your
|
|
instinct and go with the common ways of denoting dates in
|
|
your language. If all else fails, use the <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog described below.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
</note>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Regular single dates can be entered just as you would
|
|
write them. Examples: May 24, 1961 or January 1,
|
|
2004.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Dates that are not regular should start with the
|
|
quality: <guilabel>estimated</guilabel> or
|
|
<guilabel>calculated</guilabel>, if applicable.
|
|
Example: est. 1961, or calc 2005. (Note that a quality
|
|
does not need to be specified for regular dates.)
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
After the quality should appear the type. If the type is
|
|
<guilabel>before</guilabel>, <guilabel>after</guilabel>,
|
|
or <guilabel>about</guilabel>, you scan specify the type by
|
|
writing "before", "after" or
|
|
"about". If the type is a range, write
|
|
"between DATE and DATE", and if the type is a
|
|
span, write "from DATE to DATE". patterns, where
|
|
DATE is a single date.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est
|
|
about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown
|
|
information. Examples: May 1961 and 2004.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Alternate calendars are calendars other than the Gregorian
|
|
calendar. Currently, &app; supports Hebrew, French
|
|
Republican, Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate
|
|
calendars. To specify the calendar other than the
|
|
default Gregorian, append the name of the calendar to
|
|
the date string, e.g. "January 9, 1905 (julian)".
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-led">
|
|
<title>Date Validity Indicators</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
&app; uses color circles to indicate the validity of the
|
|
entered date.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Date LED buttons</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons.
|
|
Clicking on an LED button will invoke the <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog described in detail below, see
|
|
<xref linkend="adv-dates-gui"/>
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
A green circle means that the date is valid and complete
|
|
regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green
|
|
means that the date corresponds to a unique date.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a
|
|
regular date. This could be the date of a different
|
|
type: a before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date
|
|
(after May, 1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a
|
|
range (between May 1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span
|
|
(from May 1, 1961 to May 31, 1961). It can also be a
|
|
complete single date, but with quality of Estimated or
|
|
Calculated. Finally, it could be a partial date, i.e. a
|
|
regular quality single date missing some portion,
|
|
e.g. May 1961 or 1961.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they
|
|
allow at least for some type of comparisons between the
|
|
dates.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a
|
|
valid date (e.g. "Christmas week of 61", or
|
|
"the summer when I had surgery"). In such a
|
|
case the date will be stored as a text string and
|
|
therefore cannot be compared other dates. As you can
|
|
see, it is best to avoid such date entries. It would be
|
|
better, for example, to enter a date of "December
|
|
1961" and then to add the note "Christmas week
|
|
of '61."
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-gui">
|
|
<title>Graphical User Interface for Entering Dates</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
While the above parsing rules provide a guide for you to type
|
|
in most common dates, you can also use <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog. The dialog is particularly useful
|
|
for building a complex date or for simply insuring that your
|
|
information is entered in a way GRAMPS will understand. The
|
|
<guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog can be invoked by
|
|
clicking the colored circle button next to the date entry
|
|
field.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
<figure id="adv-dates-gui-fig">
|
|
<title>Date selection dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/date-selection.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="400" depth="270"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Date selection dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Calendar</guilabel> menu lets you choose a
|
|
calendar other than the default Gregorian. The
|
|
<guilabel>Quality</guilabel> menu gives you the choices of
|
|
Regular, Estimated, or Calculated. The
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel> menu allows you establish the exact
|
|
date type: Regular, Before, After, About, Range, Span, and
|
|
Text only. You can set the <guilabel>Date</guilabel> by
|
|
setting the day, the month, and the year. In the event that
|
|
your date type is Range or Span, the <guilabel>Second
|
|
date</guilabel> will be activated. Finally, the <guilabel>Text
|
|
comment</guilabel> text entry field allows storing an
|
|
arbitrary text string along with the date.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If you have an important comment to make about a date, you
|
|
are better off doing so in a Note that corresponds to the
|
|
event than in the Text comment field of the Date selection
|
|
dialog. We recommend this for the following reason: If you
|
|
enter a date by typing it directly into the date field (that
|
|
is, not via the Date selector dialog), your entry will be
|
|
copied and stored as the text comment string when GRAMPS
|
|
parses the entered text. Thus, any comment that may have
|
|
been there prior to the parsing will be overwritten.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-rel">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Relationships</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Information about relationships is entered and edited through
|
|
the <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship Editor</guilabel>
|
|
dialog. This dialog is invoked from Family View by
|
|
double-clicking the Spouse box
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
You can also invoke this dialog by right-clicking inside the
|
|
Spouse box and selecting "Edit relationship" item
|
|
from the context menu that pops up.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-rel-fig">
|
|
<title>Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-rel.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="258"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the names of the people whose
|
|
relationship is being edited. The main part of the window
|
|
displays seven notebook tabs representing different categories
|
|
of information about the relationship. Click any tab to view or
|
|
edit the information it contains. The bottom part has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button
|
|
at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
changes. If any of the data in any tab is modified, an alert
|
|
window will appear that will prompt you choose between closing
|
|
the dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial cancel
|
|
request, or saving the changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database. This version of &app; does not have
|
|
a separate saving function, all changes are immediate.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
relationship data:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you edit the
|
|
Relationship type. The available types (such as Married,
|
|
Unmarried, etc.) can be chosen from the drop-down
|
|
<guilabel>Relationship type</guilabel> menu. The
|
|
<guilabel>GRAMPS ID</guilabel> field displays the ID
|
|
number which labels this relationship in the database. The
|
|
<guilabel>Last changed</guilabel> label shows the last
|
|
time the relationship was modified. Finally, the
|
|
Information is complete check button indicates whether the
|
|
record of this relationship is complete or not.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Events</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
events relevant to the relationship. The bottom part
|
|
displays the list of all such events stored in the
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the currently
|
|
selected event in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove an
|
|
event record from the database. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when an event is selected
|
|
from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Attributes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit particular information about the relationship that
|
|
can be expressed as attributes. The bottom part displays
|
|
the list of all such attributes stored in the
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the currently
|
|
selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove an
|
|
attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when an attribute is selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Notes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
notes associated with the relationship. These could be any
|
|
comments which do not naturally fit into the
|
|
"Parameter-Value" pairs available to
|
|
Attributes. To add a note or modify existing notes simply
|
|
edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the
|
|
way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you
|
|
select Flowed, the text generated will have single spaces
|
|
put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single
|
|
end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted between two
|
|
blocks of text will signal a new paragraph; additional
|
|
inserted lines will be ignored.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
|
|
and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the
|
|
Notes dialog.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit the sources which provide evidence for the
|
|
relationship. These might be documents that refer to the
|
|
relationship, but which do not necessarily document it
|
|
officially. For example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention
|
|
that her great-grandson Paul was married, the researcher
|
|
may take this as evidence of the relationship between Paul
|
|
and his wife existed and cite the memoirs as the source
|
|
for this assumption.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Sources that document specific events such as marriages
|
|
or divorces are better filed in relation to those
|
|
events, under the Events tab.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The central part of the Sources window displays the list
|
|
of all source references associated with the
|
|
relationship. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
allow let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
|
|
to this relationship. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a source reference is
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
|
|
display photos and other media objects associated with the
|
|
relationship. The central part of the window lists all
|
|
such objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image
|
|
files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files,
|
|
etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
|
|
buttons <guilabel>+</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Select</guilabel>, <guilabel>Edit</guilabel>,
|
|
and <guilabel>-</guilabel> let you add a new image, add a
|
|
reference to an existing image, modify an existing image,
|
|
and remove a media object's link to the relationship. Note
|
|
that the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>-</guilabel> buttons become available only when
|
|
a media object is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>LDS</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab
|
|
displays information about the LDS <guilabel>Sealed to
|
|
Spouse</guilabel> ordinance. The data can include date,
|
|
LDS temple, and Place. The status of the ordinance can be
|
|
described through the selections available in the
|
|
<guilabel>Status</guilabel> pop-up menu and can also be
|
|
referenced in the corresponding
|
|
<guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-src">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Sources</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the
|
|
desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click that
|
|
entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
toolbar to invoke the following <guilabel>Source
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-src-fig">
|
|
<title>Source Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-src.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="256"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Source Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The main part of the window displays four notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
|
|
view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the
|
|
changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
|
|
the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window
|
|
without applying any changes.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
|
|
immediate.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
source data:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you define basic
|
|
information about the source: its
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>Author</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Abbreviation</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Publication information</guilabel>. You can type
|
|
this information directly into the adjacent fields.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Note</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record various information about the source that does not
|
|
fit neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify
|
|
existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Data</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Data</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
"Key/Value" pairs that may be associated with
|
|
the source. These are similar to the
|
|
"Attributes" used for other types of GRAMPS
|
|
records. The difference between these Key/Value pairs and
|
|
Attributes is that Attributes may have source references
|
|
and notes, while Key/Value data may not.
|
|
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
|
|
The central part of the window lists all existing
|
|
Key/Value pairs. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add and remove pairs. To
|
|
modify the text of Key or Value, first select the desired
|
|
entry. Then click in either the Key or Value cell of that
|
|
entry and type your text. When you are done, click outside
|
|
the cell to exit editing mode.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
|
|
display photos and other media objects associated with a
|
|
given source (for example, a photo of a birth
|
|
certificate). The central part of the window lists all
|
|
such media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of
|
|
image files. Other objects such as audio files, movie
|
|
files, etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing
|
|
image, modify an existing image, and remove a media
|
|
object's link to the source. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a media object is
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>References</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab lists all the
|
|
database records that refer to this source, if any. The
|
|
list can be ordered by any of its column headings:
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows
|
|
you to view and edit the record.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Only primary objects can be shown in the
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family,
|
|
Event, Place, or Media object. Secondary objects
|
|
such as Names and Attributes can only be accessed
|
|
through the primary objects to which they belong.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-plc">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Places</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To edit information about places, switch to the Places View and
|
|
select the desired entry from the list of places. Double-click
|
|
that entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on
|
|
the toolbar to bring up the following <guilabel>Place
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-plc-fig">
|
|
<title>Place Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-plc.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="411"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Place Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
|
|
view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the
|
|
changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
|
|
the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window
|
|
without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database). All changes are immediate.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The tabs represent following categories of place data:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab you view and edit the
|
|
basic information about the place: the
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel> which labels it in the
|
|
database, <guilabel>City</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church
|
|
parish</guilabel>, <guilabel>County</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>State</guilabel>, <guilabel>Country</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Longitude</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Latitude</guilabel>. You can type this
|
|
information directly into the adjacent fields.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Other names</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Other names</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit other names by which the place might be known. The
|
|
bottom part of the window lists all other names of the
|
|
place stored in the database. The top part of the window
|
|
shows the details of the currently selected name in the
|
|
list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add, modify, and remove a name record. Note that
|
|
the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a name is selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Note</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any comments or
|
|
notes concerning the place. To add a note or modify
|
|
existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit sources relevant to a place. The central part of the
|
|
window lists all such source references stored in the
|
|
database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
|
|
associated with a place. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a source reference is
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
|
|
display photos and other media objects associated with a
|
|
given place. The central part of the window lists all such
|
|
media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image
|
|
files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files,
|
|
etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing
|
|
image, modify an existing image, and remove a media
|
|
object's link to the place. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a media object is
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Internet</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab contains Internet
|
|
addresses relevant to the place. The bottom part of the
|
|
window lists all such Internet addresses stored in the
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the currently
|
|
selected address in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove
|
|
an Internet address. The <guibutton>Go</guibutton> button
|
|
(represented by an icon with a green arrow and yellow
|
|
circle) opens your browser and takes you to the web page
|
|
corresponding to the highlighted Internet address. Note
|
|
that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when an address is selected
|
|
from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>References</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any
|
|
database records (events or LDS ordinances) that refer to
|
|
a place. This information cannot be modified from the
|
|
Place Editor dialog. Instead, the corresponding database
|
|
record (e.g., a birth event) has to be brought up and its
|
|
place reference edited.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-media">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Media Objects</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the
|
|
desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that
|
|
entry or click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> on the toolbar to
|
|
invoke the following <guilabel>Media Properties
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-media-fig">
|
|
<title>Media Properties Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-media.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="286"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Media Properties Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
A thumbnail preview of the object is presented, along with a
|
|
summary of its properties (ID, path, and object type). The
|
|
central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
|
|
view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the
|
|
changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
|
|
the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window
|
|
without applying any changes.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
|
|
immediate.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The tabs represent the following categories of media data:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit the object's Title and Date. You can type this
|
|
information directly into the corresponding fields. For
|
|
the Date, you can also enter information by clicking the
|
|
LED button and invoking the <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Every media object is referred to by its Path. The user
|
|
is responsible for keeping track of the object
|
|
files. GRAMPS will only reference and display the
|
|
contents, not manage the files themselves.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Attributes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit particular information about the media object that
|
|
can be expressed as Attributes. The bottom part displays
|
|
the list of all such attributes stored in the
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the currently
|
|
selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove an
|
|
attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when an attribute is selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Notes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record various information about the source that does not
|
|
fit neatly into other categories. This area is
|
|
particularly useful for recording information that does
|
|
not naturally fit into the "Parameter/Value" pairs
|
|
available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>References</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any
|
|
database records that refer to a given media object. The
|
|
list can be ordered according to any of its column
|
|
headings: <guilabel>Type</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows
|
|
you to view and edit the corresponding record.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Only primary objects can be shown in the
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family,
|
|
Event, Source, or Place. The secondary objects such as
|
|
Names and Attributes, although able to refer the media
|
|
object, will only show up through their primary objects
|
|
to which they belong.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-ev">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Events</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Events are edited through the <guilabel>Event
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog can be accessed from
|
|
either the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog or the
|
|
<guilabel>Marriage/Relationship</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-ev-fig">
|
|
<title>Event Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-ev.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="316"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Event Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
|
|
view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the
|
|
changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
|
|
the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window
|
|
without applying any changes.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
the event data:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit basic information about the event: its
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Place</guilabel>, <guilabel>Cause</guilabel>,
|
|
and <guilabel>Description</guilabel>. You can type this
|
|
information directly into the adjacent fields. The type
|
|
can be selected from available types listed in the Event
|
|
type drop-down menu. The rest of the information can be
|
|
typed in the appropriate text entry fields. Checking the
|
|
Private record box marks the event record as private and
|
|
allows it to be omitted from reports.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit sources relevant to an event. The central part of the
|
|
window lists all such source references stored in the
|
|
database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
|
|
associated with a place. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a source reference is
|
|
selected from the list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Note</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record notes or comments about the event. To add a note or
|
|
modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text
|
|
entry field.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Witnesses</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Witnesses</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit witnesses to the event. The central part of the
|
|
window lists all such witnesses stored in the
|
|
database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
let you add, modify, and remove a witness reference to
|
|
this event (see <xref linkend="adv-wit"/>). Note
|
|
that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<!-- END OF EDIT -->
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-si">
|
|
<title>Editing Source References</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Source references connect a Source to another object and allow
|
|
you to provide additional information about the source. When
|
|
adding source references to events, places, etc., the following
|
|
dialog appears:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-si-fig">
|
|
<title>Source Information dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-si.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="489"/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Source Information dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The dialog includes two main headings, <guilabel>Source
|
|
selection</guilabel> and <guilabel>Source
|
|
details</guilabel>. <guilabel>Source selection</guilabel>
|
|
displays the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> of the Source, its
|
|
<guilabel>Author</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Publication
|
|
information</guilabel>. The <guilabel>Title</guilabel> can be
|
|
selected from the available sources listed in the drop-down
|
|
menu. If the source you are referencing is not already in the
|
|
database, you can enter it by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>New...</guibutton> and filling out the invoked
|
|
<guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
</para><para>
|
|
The <guilabel>Source details</guilabel> section indicates the
|
|
details associated with the particular reference to this Source:
|
|
<guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Volume/Film/Page</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Text</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Comments</guilabel>. You can choose the Confidence
|
|
level from the <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel> drop-down
|
|
menu. The remaining details can be typed in the corresponding
|
|
text entry fields.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Information in this dialog is specific to the particular
|
|
reference. A single source can be referenced many times,
|
|
and all such references will have in common the overall
|
|
source information. This dialog lets you provide
|
|
reference-specific data, such as relevant quotes, comments,
|
|
confidence, page numbers, etc., to further specify and
|
|
document the reference.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-an">
|
|
<title>Names</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Names are edited through the following <guilabel>Name
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-an-fig">
|
|
<title>Name Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-an.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="400" depth="509" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Name Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
name of the person whose name is being edited. The central
|
|
part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
|
|
different categories of available information. You can bring
|
|
any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
|
|
appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
name data:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
general information about the name: given name, family
|
|
name, patronymic (a form of father's name used in some
|
|
languages, e.g. Russian), family prefix, suffix, title,
|
|
and type of the name. The information can be typed in
|
|
the appropriate text entry fields. The family name and
|
|
the type can be also selected from available choices
|
|
listed in the appropriate drop-down menus. </para>
|
|
<para><guilabel>Options</guilabel> allow you to adjust
|
|
specific grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of
|
|
this name, as well as to provide the date corresponding
|
|
to the name. The <guilabel>Grouping</guilabel> field
|
|
provides an alternative grouping node for a given name,
|
|
overriding the default grouping based on the family
|
|
name. This may be necessary with similar family names
|
|
that need to be grouped together -- for example Russian
|
|
names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but
|
|
difference in gender is reflected in different
|
|
spelling. To enable typing into this field, check the
|
|
<guilabel>Override</guilabel> check button. The
|
|
<guilabel>Sort as</guilabel> and <guilabel>Display
|
|
as</guilabel> determine the manner in which the name
|
|
appears in the People View and in the reports. The
|
|
<guilabel>Date</guilabel> can provide information on the
|
|
validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check
|
|
the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this
|
|
name record as private. This will give you a chance to
|
|
omit this name from being included in reports, if you
|
|
choose so among the report generation options.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
information about sources relevant to this name and
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
displays the list of all such sources' references stored
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
name. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-at">
|
|
<title>Attributes</title>
|
|
<para> Attributes are edited through the following
|
|
<guilabel>Attribute Editor</guilabel> dialog: </para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-at-fig">
|
|
<title>Attribute Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-at.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="430" depth="248" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Attribute Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
name of the person whose attribute is being edited. The
|
|
central part of the window displays three notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of available information. You
|
|
can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by
|
|
clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
the attribute data: </para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
the most general information about the attribute: name
|
|
of the attribute and its value. The information can be
|
|
typed in the appropriate text entry fields. The
|
|
attribute name can also be selected from available
|
|
choices (if any) listed in the <guilabel>Attribute
|
|
</guilabel> drop-down menu. Check the <guilabel>Private
|
|
record</guilabel> box to mark this attribute record as
|
|
private. This will give you a chance to omit this
|
|
attribute from being included in the reports, if you
|
|
choose so among the report generation options.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
information about sources relevant to this attribute and
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
displays the list of all such sources references stored
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify
|
|
existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-ad">
|
|
<title>Addresses</title>
|
|
<para> Addresses are edited through the following
|
|
<guilabel>Address Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-ad-fig">
|
|
<title>Address Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-ad.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="376" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Address Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
|
|
name of the person whose address is being edited. The central
|
|
part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
|
|
different categories of available information. You can bring
|
|
any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
|
|
appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
|
|
regular (not bold).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
address data:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
the most general information about the address: date,
|
|
street address, city or county, state or province,
|
|
country, the postal code, and the phone number. The
|
|
information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
|
|
fields. Check the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel>
|
|
box to mark this address record as private. This will
|
|
give you a chance to omit this address from being
|
|
included in reports, if you choose so among the report
|
|
generation options.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays
|
|
information about sources relevant to this address and
|
|
controls allowing its modification. The central part
|
|
displays the list of all such sources references stored
|
|
in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly
|
|
add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
|
|
address. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Note</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
|
|
reports and web pages). Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple
|
|
spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
|
|
single space in the output. The two consecutive new
|
|
lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
|
|
Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor
|
|
all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
|
|
output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
|
|
field.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-wit">
|
|
<title>Witnesses</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Witnesses are edited through the following <guilabel>Witness
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-wi-fig">
|
|
<title>Witness Editor dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-wi.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="450" depth="259" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Witness Editor dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The top of the window shows the dialog title. The central part
|
|
of the window displays information about the witness. The
|
|
bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all
|
|
the changes made and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close
|
|
the window without applying any changes.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The witness name can be entered in two ways, depending upon
|
|
whether the witness is a person already stored in the database
|
|
or not (unrelated person).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If the person you would like to add as a witness is in fact
|
|
a member of the database, it is better to use the first
|
|
method below.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Person from the database</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If the person's data are stored in a database, check
|
|
<guilabel>Person is in the database</guilabel> box. Then
|
|
click the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to invoke
|
|
<guilabel>Select Person</guilabel> dialog. Choose the
|
|
person from that dialog and click the
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. The
|
|
<guilabel>Person</guilabel> text field will display the
|
|
name of the person you selected.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Even though the person's name is displayed in the
|
|
<guilabel>Person</guilabel> field, it is not available
|
|
for direct editing.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Unrelated person</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If the person is not in the database, make sure that
|
|
<guilabel>Person is in the database</guilabel> box is
|
|
unchecked. Then enter the name or any description of a
|
|
person into the <guilabel>Person</guilabel> text entry
|
|
field. This information is stored as entered, and this
|
|
is the only place it is stored. In other words, there
|
|
is no reference to that person in the entire database
|
|
except for this witness reference. If the person is in
|
|
fact a member of the database, it is advised to use the
|
|
former method.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> text area allows you to enter
|
|
any comments concerning the witness. To add a comment or to
|
|
modify existing comments simply edit the text in the text
|
|
area.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-merge">
|
|
<title>Merging records</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Sometime several records in the database turn out to be
|
|
describing the same object: same person, same place, or same
|
|
source. It could happen either when the data is entered twice
|
|
by mistake, or when new information reveals that the two
|
|
entries refer to the same person. It can also happen after
|
|
importing GEDCOM obtained from a relative, whose database
|
|
overlaps with your existing data.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful
|
|
way of correcting the situation.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in
|
|
the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places
|
|
View). This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then
|
|
selecting another person while holding down
|
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-people">
|
|
<title>Merge People</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
There are two ways of merging personal records:
|
|
<guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel> and <guilabel>Fast
|
|
Merge</guilabel>, both available from the
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Merging people does not discard any information with
|
|
either method. The decisions you make during the merge
|
|
only affect which data will become primary and which will
|
|
become secondary for the resulting merged record.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When exactly two people are selected, choose
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Compare
|
|
and Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke
|
|
<guilabel>Compare People</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="comp-people-fig">
|
|
<title>Compare People dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/comp-people.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="469" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Compare People dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or
|
|
not the selected records should be merged. If you
|
|
decide that the records should not be merged, despite
|
|
similar names, you may click
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog
|
|
without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
|
|
with merging, select the appropriate
|
|
<guilabel>Select</guilabel> radio button to specify
|
|
the record to be used as the source of primary data,
|
|
then click <guibutton>Merge and close</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The data from the other record will be kept as
|
|
alternate data. Specifically, all names from the other
|
|
record will become alternate names of the merged
|
|
record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and children of
|
|
the other record will become alternate parents,
|
|
spouses, and children of the merged record, and so on.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>
|
|
<guilabel>Fast Merge</guilabel>
|
|
</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When exactly two people are selected, choose
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fast
|
|
Merge</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke
|
|
<guilabel>Merge People</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<figure id="merge-people-fig">
|
|
<title>Merge People dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-people.png"
|
|
format="PNG" width="382" depth="245"
|
|
/>
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Merge People dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records,
|
|
specifying the record to be used as the source of
|
|
primary data. The data from the other record will be
|
|
kept as alternate data. Specifically, all names from
|
|
the other record will become alternate names of the
|
|
merged record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and
|
|
children of the other record will become alternate
|
|
parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
|
|
and so on.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If you are not certain whether or not you need to
|
|
merge the records, or which record to specify as the
|
|
source of primary data, use <guilabel>Compare and
|
|
Merge</guilabel> method described above..
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-sources">
|
|
<title>Merge Sources</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When exactly two sources are selected, choose
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge
|
|
|
|
Sources</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-src-fig">
|
|
<title>Merge Sources dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-src.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="224" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Merge Sources dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
|
|
the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
|
|
the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
|
|
you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the
|
|
dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
|
|
with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
|
|
the title, author, abbreviated title, publication
|
|
information, and the ID to be used for the merged record,
|
|
then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-places">
|
|
<title>Merge Places</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When exactly two places are selected, choose
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
to invoke <guilabel>Select title</guilabel> dialog.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-plc-fig">
|
|
<title>Merge Places dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-plc.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="400" depth="185" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Select title dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
|
|
the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
|
|
the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
|
|
you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the
|
|
dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
|
|
with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
|
|
the title of the merged record, or specify
|
|
<guilabel>Other</guilabel> and enter new text, then click
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-nav">
|
|
<title>Navigation</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
As long as any database is open, &app; is focused on a single
|
|
person usually referred to as an Active person. This allows
|
|
you to view or modify the data concerning this person, his or
|
|
her immediate family, etc. Navigating in the database (i.e.
|
|
moving from person to person) is in fact nothing else but
|
|
changing the Active person. This section describes many
|
|
alternative ways to navigate through the database using both
|
|
the complex and the convenient interfaces &app; provides. All
|
|
these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are
|
|
more convenient than others, depending what you are doing in
|
|
&app; at the moment.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-people">
|
|
<title>Using the People View </title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The most intuitive way to select an active person is to use
|
|
the People View (see <xref linkend="people-view"/>). When in
|
|
the People View, just select the name of the desired person
|
|
from the list by clicking that list entry. The person you have
|
|
selected becomes active. The statusbar updates to reflect the
|
|
change of the active person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-family">
|
|
<title>Using the Family View</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When in the Family View (see <xref linkend="family-view"/>),
|
|
you can easily navigate between the members of the displayed
|
|
family as follows:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected spouse the active person,
|
|
click the double-arrow button to the right of the active
|
|
person box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse
|
|
box and select <guilabel>Make the selected spouse an
|
|
active person</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected parents the active family
|
|
(thereby making father the active person and mother the
|
|
selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
|
|
right of the active person's parents box. Alternatively,
|
|
right-click into the active person's parents box and
|
|
select <guilabel>Make the selected parents the active
|
|
family</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active
|
|
family (thereby making father the active person and mother
|
|
the selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
|
|
right of the spouse's parents box. Alternatively,
|
|
right-click into the spouse's parents box and select
|
|
<guilabel>Make the selected parents the active
|
|
family</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make the currently selected child the active person,
|
|
click the left-arrow button to the right of the children
|
|
box. Alternatively, right-click into the children box and
|
|
select <guilabel>Make the selected child an active
|
|
person</guilabel> item from the context menu.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
In addition to this, &app; provides an extensive set of
|
|
keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key
|
|
bindings is found in the <xref linkend="append-keybind"/>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-pedigree">
|
|
<title>Using the Pedigree View</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Pedigree View (see <xref linkend="pedigree-view"/>) also
|
|
allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this
|
|
method is that you can see more than one generation of the
|
|
family tree. Also, you can jump directly from a great-grandson
|
|
to a great-grandfather without going through the intermediate
|
|
generations.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Note that after changing the active person in the Pedigree
|
|
View, the display is re-adjusted to show four generations,
|
|
starting from the newly selected Active person. When in the
|
|
Pedigree View, you can easily navigate between the members of
|
|
the displayed family tree as follows:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make any displayed person the active person,
|
|
double-click the line that connects to the left side of
|
|
the corresponding box.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To make a child of the currently active person (if any)
|
|
the active person, click the left arrow button to the left
|
|
of the corresponding box. If there is more than one child,
|
|
the button expands to the menu listing the children to
|
|
choose from.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To move the whole family tree one generation back, click
|
|
on the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand
|
|
side of the display area. Clicking the upper button will
|
|
move the tree along the paternal line. Clicking the lower
|
|
button will move the tree along the maternal line.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent
|
|
to double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the
|
|
corresponding boxes for father and mother.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings,
|
|
children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move
|
|
the mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to
|
|
invoke a context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain
|
|
submenus listing all spouses, siblings, children, and parents
|
|
of the corresponding person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Advantages of using right-click menus</title>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Direct access to spouse and siblings</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only
|
|
the preferred members.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-default">
|
|
<title>Setting the Home Person</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
One and only one person in the database can be selected as the
|
|
Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that
|
|
person becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which
|
|
view you are using at the moment.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using
|
|
any method you like. Then choose
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Set Home person</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
Once this is done, you can move to the Home person from
|
|
anywhere in the database by simply clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Home</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. You can also
|
|
choose
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
from the menu or select <guilabel>Home</guilabel> item from
|
|
any context menu available on the right click.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-history">
|
|
<title>Using history-based tools</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
&app; also features a powerful set of history-based navigation
|
|
tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web
|
|
browsers. They include <guilabel>Back</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Forward</guilabel> items available from the
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and Pedigree
|
|
views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list of
|
|
the recent selections available under the
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the recent
|
|
selections. Finally, right-clicking on the
|
|
<guibutton>Back</guibutton> and <guibutton>Forward</guibutton>
|
|
toolbar buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding
|
|
portion of the history. Select any item from the menu to jump
|
|
directly to it.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-bookmk">
|
|
<title>Bookmarking People</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other
|
|
people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark
|
|
a person, first navigate to that person, then choose
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Add bookmark</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
To move to that person from anywhere in the database, choose
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>Go to bookmark</guisubmenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>
|
|
<replaceable>Person's name</replaceable>
|
|
</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
You can manage your bookmarks by choosing
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Edit bookmarks...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
This opens the following <guilabel>Edit Bookmarks</guilabel>
|
|
dialog with the list of bookmarks and the controls to modify
|
|
this list.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-bm-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Bookmarks dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-bm.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="412" depth="376" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-find">
|
|
<title>Finding records</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
To find a record in a database, first switch to the
|
|
appropriate View that provides the list of the desired
|
|
records: People, Sources, Places, or Media. Then start typing
|
|
the name of a person or the title of a Source, Place, or Media
|
|
object that you are looking for, respectively. You may also
|
|
press <keycap>Ctrl+F</keycap> to turn on the search mode, but
|
|
simply staring to type is also enough.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="find-people-fig">
|
|
<title>Type-ahead find</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/find-people.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="352" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows type-ahead find. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible
|
|
with your input will be selected.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Finding People</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
For more complex people searches you may want to use
|
|
filters. Enable filter controls by choosing
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>,
|
|
|
|
select the desired filter, and click <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.
|
|
For details, see <xref linkend="filters"/>
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gen-reports">
|
|
<title>Generating Reports</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Reports are the most common form of the output produced by
|
|
genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software
|
|
puts a lot of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. &app;
|
|
is no exception in this regard, offering a choice of a variety
|
|
of reports. &app; can generate reports in a multitude of open
|
|
formats, both text based and graphical. &app; can also produce
|
|
screen based reports that are convenient for viewing a summary
|
|
of your database. Finally, &app; can generate a web site
|
|
suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All of these are
|
|
almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend the
|
|
default format of &app; report, you can design and choose the
|
|
style for each of your reports.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>
|
|
<replaceable>Report Type</replaceable>
|
|
</guisubmenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>
|
|
<replaceable>Particular Report</replaceable>
|
|
</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
|
|
available reports along with their brief descriptions in a
|
|
<guilabel>Report Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking
|
|
the <guibutton>Reports</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="subst-values">
|
|
<title>Substitution Values</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the
|
|
information on the display. Variable substituions are used
|
|
to substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two
|
|
styles of variables. The difference between the two styles
|
|
is how empty data is handled.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If
|
|
the variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is
|
|
replaced with the empty string. The second style of
|
|
variables are preceeded by a '%'. If the variable evaluates
|
|
to an empty string, the line that contains the variable is
|
|
removed from the output.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$n/%n</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName LastName
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$N/%N</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the person's name in the form of LastName, FirstName
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$i/%i</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$b/%b</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the person's date of birth
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$B/%B</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the person's place of birth
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$d/%d</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the person's date of death
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$D/%D</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the person's place of death
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$s/%s</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
|
|
the form of FirstName LastName
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$S/%S</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
|
|
the form of LastName, FirstName.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$m/%m</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred
|
|
spouse.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$M/%M</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the
|
|
person and the preferred spouse.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-books">
|
|
<title>Books</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Currently, the only available report under this category is
|
|
the Book Report.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book)
|
|
containing a collection of graphical and textual reports.
|
|
Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents
|
|
that &app; can produce.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration
|
|
dialog appears:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="rep-book-fig">
|
|
<title>Book Report dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/bookreport.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="510" depth="524" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Book Report dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field is used to
|
|
save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use.
|
|
The top pane lists the items available for inclusion in the
|
|
book. The bottom pane lists the currently selected items in
|
|
the order they will appear in the book.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The horizontal set of buttons by the <guilabel>Book
|
|
name</guilabel> field operates on the whole book. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button to clear all items from
|
|
the current book. Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button
|
|
to save the current book (under the name typed in the
|
|
<guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field) for future
|
|
use.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Saving the book also saves the configuration for each item.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button to load the book
|
|
from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit books</guibutton> button to invoke the
|
|
editable list of available books.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane
|
|
operates on the selected book item. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to add selected item from
|
|
the available list to the current book. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to remove an item from
|
|
the current book. Use <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Down</guibutton> to change the items order in the
|
|
current book. Click the <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> button to
|
|
configure the options of the selected item of the current
|
|
book.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The configuration dialogs invoked by
|
|
<guibutton>Setup</guibutton> are item-specific. If you choose
|
|
not to configure the item, same defaults will be used for all
|
|
needed options. The common option for almost all book items is
|
|
the center person: the person on whom the item is
|
|
centered. Thanks to this option, you can create a book with
|
|
items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's and dad's
|
|
ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center person
|
|
is set to the active person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are
|
|
textual or graphical reports, and are therefore available in
|
|
the form of standalone reports. The exception is the following
|
|
items which are only available as book items:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Title Page</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This item produces a customized Title page. You can
|
|
configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of
|
|
the page. An image can be optionally placed between the
|
|
subtitle and the footer. Because of its
|
|
configurability, this item can be used to create title
|
|
pages for the whole book, its chapter, or even a single
|
|
item.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Custom Text</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each
|
|
containing custom text. The appearance of the text can
|
|
be adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant
|
|
to be used for epigraphs, dedications, explanations,
|
|
notes, and so forth.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-codegen">
|
|
<title>Code Generators</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This category contains reports that produce code intended to
|
|
be run through the computer, rather than the usual formatted
|
|
output for human reading. The only code generator currently
|
|
available in &app; is the Relationship Graph producing the
|
|
GraphViz description of the graph.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in
|
|
GraphViz format. The GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool can
|
|
transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and
|
|
other formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the
|
|
<ulink url="http://www.graphviz.org" type="http">GraphViz
|
|
site</ulink>. Specific options for this report include filter
|
|
and number of generations considered, as well as several
|
|
GraphViz-specific options related to pagination, color, and
|
|
details of the graph.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just
|
|
want to generate graphical output, &app; can do it for you
|
|
under the hood. Look for <guilabel>Relationship
|
|
Graph</guilabel> in the Graphical Reports category, <xref
|
|
linkend="rep-graph"/>
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-graph">
|
|
<title>Graphical Reports</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and
|
|
graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical
|
|
reports, therefore they will be described only once, at the
|
|
end of this section. The few options which are specific to a
|
|
given report will be described directly in that report's
|
|
entry.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The following graphical reports are currently available in
|
|
&app;:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Ancestor Chart</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report generates the chart of people who are
|
|
ancestors of the Active person. Specific options include
|
|
the number of generations considered and the format of
|
|
the displayed entries.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It
|
|
provides more options which make it useful for
|
|
generating huge charts suitable for a poster or a wall
|
|
chart. These options include the ability to compress the
|
|
report (getting rid of an empty space) and the option to
|
|
fit the whole chart on to a single page. In the latter
|
|
case, the contents of the chart is scaled down
|
|
appropriately.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Descendant Graph</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report generates a graph of people who are
|
|
descendants of the Active person. Specific options
|
|
include the format of the displayed entries.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Fan Chart</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active
|
|
person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to
|
|
it, grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a
|
|
total of five generations.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationship Graph</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report creates a complex relationship graph in
|
|
GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output
|
|
running it through the the GraphViz
|
|
<command>dot</command> tool behind the scene. Specific
|
|
options for this report include filter, options for
|
|
dates and places for the events, and whether to include
|
|
URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are
|
|
also several GraphViz-specific options related to
|
|
pagination, color, and details of the graph.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Statistics Chart</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report can collect and display a wealth of
|
|
statistical data about your database. Specific options
|
|
include filter, sorting methods, and additional birth-
|
|
and gender-based limit for inclusion into statistics.
|
|
You can also set the minimum number of items to qualify
|
|
for the bar chart, so that the charts with fewer items
|
|
will generate a pie chart instead. The <guilabel>Chart
|
|
Selection</guilabel> tab allows you to check which
|
|
charts you want to include in your report.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Timeline Graph</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report outputs the list of people with their
|
|
lifetimes represented by intervals on a common
|
|
chronological scale. Specific options include filter,
|
|
sorting method, and the title of the report.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the
|
|
output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
|
|
and orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
|
|
opened with the default application.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The options used in reports are persistent: each report
|
|
remembers its options used last time.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-text">
|
|
<title>Text Reports</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Text reports represent the desired information as formatted
|
|
text. Most of the options are common among text reports,
|
|
therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this
|
|
section. The options which are specific to a given report will
|
|
be described directly in that report's entry.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The following text reports are currently available in &app;:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Ahnentafel Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report lists the active person and his or her
|
|
ancestors along with their vital data. The people are
|
|
numbered in a special way which is an established
|
|
standard called Ahnentafel. The active person is given
|
|
number 1. His or her father and mother have numbers 2
|
|
and 3, respectively. This rule holds for every person
|
|
while going back in generations: father's parents are
|
|
numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered 6
|
|
and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers
|
|
with odd numbers. Therefore, for any person having
|
|
number N in this tree, the numbers of father and mother
|
|
are 2N and 2N+1, respectively.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Complete Individual Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report provides individual summaries similar to
|
|
that of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of
|
|
this report is the specific filter option. Depending on
|
|
the filter choice (active person only, his or her
|
|
descendants, his or her ancestors, or entire database),
|
|
the report may contain from one to many individual
|
|
summaries. Another option for this report is the
|
|
inclusion of source information when listing events.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Comprehensive Ancestors Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report produces a comprehensive description of
|
|
ancestors of the active person. The highlights of this
|
|
report include elaborate layout, images of children,
|
|
present and former spouses, and source
|
|
citations. Specific options: number of backward
|
|
generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and
|
|
whether to break pages between generations.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Descendant Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report produces a brief description of descendants
|
|
of the active person. Specific options: number of
|
|
forward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Detailed Ancestral Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active
|
|
person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well
|
|
as marriages. Specific options: number of backward
|
|
generations to consider, as well as a variety of options
|
|
regarding the exact contents to include.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Detailed Descendant Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report covers in detail the descendants of the
|
|
active person. It includes vital (birth and death)
|
|
information as well as marriages. Specific options:
|
|
number of forward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>FTM Style Ancestral Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report creates an ancestral report similar to that
|
|
produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
|
|
covers in detail the active person and his/her ancestors
|
|
It includes vital information as well as marriages,
|
|
children, and notes. Specific options: number of
|
|
backward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>FTM Style Descendant Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report creates a descendant report similar to that
|
|
produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
|
|
covers in detail the active person and his/her
|
|
descendants. It includes vital information as well as
|
|
marriages, children, and notes. Specific options: number
|
|
of forward generations to consider.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Family Group Report</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This creates a family group report, showing information
|
|
on a set of parents and their children. Specific
|
|
options: the spouse (available only if the active person
|
|
has more than one spouse).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Individual Summary</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report produces a detailed summary on the active
|
|
person. The report includes all the facts known to the
|
|
database about that person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Common options for text reports are the filename of the
|
|
output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
|
|
and orientation. For HTML reports, there is no page
|
|
information. Instead, HTML options include the choice of the
|
|
HTML template, either available in &app; or a custom template
|
|
defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
|
|
opened with the default application.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The options used in reports are persistent: each report
|
|
remembers its options used last time.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-view">
|
|
<title>View Reports</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
View reports are representing overall summaries of the
|
|
database information available immediately for on-screen
|
|
viewing. The following view reports are currently available
|
|
in &app;:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Number of ancestors</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report displays the number of ancestors of the
|
|
active person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Summary of the database</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This report displays the overall statistics concerning
|
|
number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete
|
|
entries statistics, as well as family and media
|
|
statistics.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-web">
|
|
<title>Web Page</title>
|
|
<para>The only available report in this category
|
|
is the Narrative Web Site report. It generates a
|
|
web site (that is, a set of linked web pages), for
|
|
a set of selected individuals.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="rep-web-narr">
|
|
<title>Narrative Web Site</title>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Introduction</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
&app; 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator.
|
|
The new tool provides considerably more functionality
|
|
than the older web generator. Instead of using HTML
|
|
templates to customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
More information is now displayed about each person,
|
|
along with information about sources, places, and media
|
|
objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional
|
|
information, such as family history.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Selecting the output</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web
|
|
servers have a difficult time with many files in a single
|
|
directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the
|
|
number of files per directory to a managable level. To do
|
|
this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated
|
|
files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person.
|
|
Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making
|
|
it easy to replace files.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
By default, the output files are written to the specified
|
|
directory. Because of the number of files and directories
|
|
that are created, it may be difficult to transfer the files
|
|
to an external web host. To aid in this, you may directly
|
|
create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the data.
|
|
This is the format that should be used if you would like
|
|
to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the
|
|
<ulink url="http://family.gramps-project.org"
|
|
type="http">GRAMPS web hosting site</ulink>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To select the gzip'd tar file, select the <guilabel>Store
|
|
web pages in .tar.gz archive</guilabel> option.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Applying a filter</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Like the previous web page generator, and most of the other
|
|
&app; reports, you can control what is included in the output
|
|
by choosing a filter. Several default filters are provided for
|
|
you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter Editor tool to
|
|
create your own.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due
|
|
to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The default
|
|
filter includes all people in the database.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Applying a style sheet</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web page.
|
|
Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for your pages.
|
|
The generated style sheet is named <filename>narrative.css</filename>.
|
|
You may edit this file if you wish to further customize your
|
|
site.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need to be aware
|
|
the regenerating the pages with the same output directory will
|
|
overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent this from happening,
|
|
make sure you choose <guilabel>No style sheet</guilabel> for subsequent
|
|
runs.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Character set encoding</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the default character
|
|
set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This provides support for virtually
|
|
all characters.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to override
|
|
the character set specified in an HTML page. This causes problems with
|
|
the UTF-8 character set generated by GRAMPS, distorting characters on
|
|
the screen.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have priveledge
|
|
to fix the configururation, you may solve this problem by overriding the
|
|
default character set to match what your web server may be expecting.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Copyright notice</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>International copyright law reserves all rights to your data.
|
|
You own the data, and people must get your permission to use it.
|
|
In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal. It this case, you
|
|
may wish to grant the user more rights.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice indicating that
|
|
all rights are reserved, we give you the option to place your site under
|
|
one of several of the Create Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons
|
|
license, you grant user's certain permission to use your data without
|
|
requiring them to contact you directly for permission.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>See the <ulink url="http://creativecommons.org/" type="http">Creative
|
|
Commons</ulink> web site for more information.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Controlling page generation</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Three additional pages can be generated by the web page generator.
|
|
The Home page is a page that will display an image and a whatever text
|
|
you wish. To enable this page, choose a Media Object
|
|
from the <guilabel>Home Media/Note ID</guilabel> menu on the <guilabel>Page
|
|
Generation</guilabel> tab. If the Media Object contains an image, the image
|
|
is displayed at the top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note,
|
|
the Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page, the
|
|
Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media Object in the
|
|
<guilabel>Introduction Media/Note ID</guilabel> menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher information
|
|
stored in the database is displayed, along with the information specified
|
|
in the <guilabel>Publisher contact/Note ID</guilabel> menu. Please use
|
|
this page with caution,
|
|
since you may consider your contact information to be private.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Privacy</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Privacy of personal information is an important issue on the web
|
|
today. &app; tries to give you control over the information that is presented.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>&app; provides two options to control the privacy of your information.
|
|
If you select the <guilabel>Do not include records marked private</guilabel>
|
|
option, any data that is marked as private will not be displayed on the
|
|
generated site. If you select <guilabel>Restrict information on living people</guilabel>,
|
|
&app; will attempt to determine which people have the potential of still
|
|
being alive, and will omit these people from the database. Some countries
|
|
have laws that indicate that a certain number of years must pass after
|
|
someone's death before information can be published. The <guilabel>Years
|
|
to restrict from person's death</guilabel> option allows you to specifiy
|
|
how many years a person must be deceased before the information is included.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Please note that it is your responsibility to double check all
|
|
information in the pages for any privacy information. &app; cannot be held
|
|
responsible for any privacy issues.</para>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Adding custom code your pages</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you may skip
|
|
the section.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The previous web generator allowed you to customize your pages
|
|
using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for certain markers
|
|
in the code.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users. The Narrative
|
|
Web Page Generator introduces a simpler mechanism. On the <guilabel>Page
|
|
Generation</guilabel> tab, you may specify text (including HTML code) that
|
|
will be inserted into each page, separately for the header and the
|
|
footer.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To create this code, you need to create a Media Object marked as an
|
|
internal note. To create this, add a new Media Object in the Media View,
|
|
and select the internal note option. You may then enter your HTML code.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
To insert the code from the internal notes into the web pages,
|
|
select the appropriate Media Objects from the <guilabel>HTML user
|
|
header</guilabel> and <guilabel>HTML user footer</guilabel> menus.
|
|
Two div sections will be added to the pages - userheader and userfooter.
|
|
The corresponding HTML code is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div
|
|
markers. You can customize your style sheet to provide additional formatting
|
|
and positioning information to control these sections.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-tools">
|
|
<title>Running Tools</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
&app; tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of
|
|
your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce
|
|
output in form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce
|
|
screen output immediately available for the
|
|
researcher. However, when appropriate, you can save the
|
|
results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of
|
|
the major strengths of &app; compared to the most genealogical
|
|
software.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>
|
|
<replaceable>Tool Section</replaceable>
|
|
</guisubmenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>
|
|
<replaceable>Particular Tool</replaceable>
|
|
</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
|
|
available tools along with their brief descriptions in a
|
|
<guilabel>Tool Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking
|
|
the <guibutton>Tools</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-ae">
|
|
<title>Analysis and Exploration</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This section contains tools which analyze and explore the
|
|
database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration
|
|
tools are currently available in &app;:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Compare individual events</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool compares events across the selected group of
|
|
people. The people for this comparison are chosen with
|
|
the use of custom filters. The custom filters can be
|
|
created in the Custom Filter Editor (see <xref
|
|
linkend="tools-util-cfe"/>) that can be invoked by
|
|
clicking the <guilabel>Custom Filter Editor</guilabel>
|
|
button. The resulting table produced by this tool can be
|
|
saved as a spreadsheet.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Interactive descendant browser</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool builds a tree with the active person being the
|
|
root. Children branch from their parents in the usual
|
|
manner. Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's
|
|
descendants.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the
|
|
<guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog allowing to
|
|
view or modify the personal data.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-db">
|
|
<title>Database Processing</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This section contains tools which may modify your database.
|
|
The tools from this section are used mostly for finding and
|
|
correcting errors in the data. The following database
|
|
processing tools are currently available in &app;:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit
|
|
consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by
|
|
<guilabel>Check and repair database</guilabel> tool.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Check and repair database</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool checks the database for integrity problems,
|
|
fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is
|
|
checking for:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Broken family links. These are the cases when a
|
|
person's record refers to a family while the
|
|
family's record does not refer to that person, and
|
|
vice versa.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Missing media objects. The missing media object is
|
|
the object whose file is referenced in the database
|
|
but does not exist. This can happen when the file is
|
|
accidentally deleted, renamed, or moved to another
|
|
location.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Empty families. These are the family entries which
|
|
have no reference to any person as their member.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Parent relationship. This checks all families to
|
|
ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The
|
|
check is also made that parents have different
|
|
gender. If they have common gender then their
|
|
relationship is renamed to "Partners".
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Extract information from names</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
|
|
extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a
|
|
person's <guilabel>Given name</guilabel> field. If any
|
|
information could be extracted, the candidates for
|
|
fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
|
|
decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Find possible duplicate people</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool searches the entire database, looking for the
|
|
entries that may represent the same person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Fix capitalization of family names</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
|
|
fix the capitalization of family names. The aim is to
|
|
have conventional capitalization: capital first letter
|
|
and lower case for the rest of the family name. If
|
|
deviations from this rule are detected, the candidates
|
|
for fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
|
|
decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Rename personal event types</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool allows all the events of a certain name
|
|
to be renamed to a new name.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Reorder &app; IDs</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This tool reorders the &app; IDs according to the
|
|
defaults of &app;.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-debug">
|
|
<title>Debug</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This section contains debugging tools that are not of general
|
|
interest for many of the users of &app;. If you're not
|
|
interested in debugging or developing &app; you may safely
|
|
skip this section.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Python evaluation window</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Enter expression into the <guilabel>Evaluation
|
|
Window</guilabel>, get the output in <guilabel>Output
|
|
Window</guilabel>. Any errors should end up in the
|
|
<guilabel>Error Window</guilabel>.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Reload plugins</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Makes an attempt to reload all plugins.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This tool is itself a plugin, but it will not reload itself!
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Show uncollected objects</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Provides the window listing all uncollected objects.
|
|
Depending on the system settings, recently abandoned GUI
|
|
objects may still be uncollected.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-util">
|
|
<title>Utilities</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple
|
|
operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in
|
|
your database, but they will not modify your existing data.
|
|
The following utilities are currently available in &app;:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-cfe">
|
|
<title>Custom Filter Editor</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be
|
|
used to select people included in reports, exports, and
|
|
other tools and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful
|
|
tool in genealogical analysis.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
When you launch it, the <guilabel>User defined
|
|
filters</guilabel> dialog appears that lists all the filters
|
|
(if any) previously defined by you. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button to define a new filter.
|
|
Once you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and
|
|
delete selected filters using the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit...</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Test...</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> buttons, respectively. All the
|
|
filters displayed in the list will be automatically saved
|
|
along with your database and will be available with
|
|
subsequent sessions of &app;.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The changes made to the filters only take effect when you
|
|
click the <guibutton>Apply and close</guibutton> button.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the
|
|
following <guilabel>Define filter</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="cfe-df-fig">
|
|
<title>Define filter dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/cfe-df.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="400" depth="410" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Define filter dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Type the name for your new filter into the
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. Enter any comment that
|
|
would help you identify this filter in the future into the
|
|
<guilabel>Comment</guilabel> field. Add as many rules to the
|
|
<guilabel>Rule list</guilabel> as you would like to your
|
|
filter using <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. If the
|
|
filter has more than one rule, select one of the
|
|
<guilabel>Rule operations</guilabel>. This allows you to
|
|
choose whether all rules must apply, only one (either) rule
|
|
must apply, or exactly one (either) rule must apply, in
|
|
order for the filter to generate a match. If your filter has
|
|
only one rule, this selection has no effect.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Check <guilabel>Return values that do not match the filter
|
|
rules</guilabel> to invert the filter rule. For example,
|
|
inverting "has a common ancestor with I1" rule will match
|
|
everyone who does not have a common ancestor with that
|
|
person).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes
|
|
the following <guilabel>Add Rule</guilabel> dialog:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="cfe-ar-fig">
|
|
<title>Add Rule dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/cfe-ar.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="297" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Add Rule dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter
|
|
rules arranged by their categories in an expandable
|
|
tree. For detailed filter rule reference, see <xref
|
|
linkend="append-filtref"/>. Click on the arrows to
|
|
fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the rule from
|
|
the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side
|
|
displays the name, the description, and the values for the
|
|
currently selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your
|
|
rule selection and its values, click
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add this rule to the rule list
|
|
of the currently edited filter. Clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> will abort adding the rule to
|
|
the filter.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule
|
|
for another filter. This gives you nearly infinite
|
|
flexibility in custom-tailoring your selection criteria
|
|
that can be later used in most of the exports, reports,
|
|
and some of the tools (such as comparing individual
|
|
events).
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-scratch-pad">
|
|
<title>Scratch Pad</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database
|
|
records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the
|
|
copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects
|
|
to other types of records used in &app;.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop technique.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>Utilities</guisubmenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Scratch Pad</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>
|
|
|
|
or click the <guilabel>ScratchPad</guilabel> button on the
|
|
toolbar. The following window will appear:
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="scratch-pad-fig">
|
|
<title>Scratch Pad tool</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/scratch-pad.png" format="PNG"
|
|
width="500" depth="246" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Add Scratch Pad tool. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal
|
|
and family), events (both personal and family), names, media
|
|
objects references, source references, URLs, and of course
|
|
textual information of notes and comments. To store any type
|
|
of these records, simply drag the existing record on to the
|
|
Scratch Pad from the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse
|
|
the record, drag it from the Scratch Pad on to the
|
|
corresponding place in the editor, e.g. Address tab,
|
|
Attribute tab, etc.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This
|
|
indicates that dragging such selection will produce a
|
|
reference to an existing object, not copy the object
|
|
itself.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
For example, the media object file will not be duplicated.
|
|
Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media
|
|
object, which will result in the local gallery entry.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single &app;
|
|
session. Closing the window will not lose the stored
|
|
records. However, exiting &app; will.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-other">
|
|
<title>Other tools</title>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Generate SoundEx codes</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of
|
|
people in the database. Please visit the <ulink
|
|
url="http://www.archives.gov/research_room/genealogy/census/soundex.html"
|
|
type="http">NARA Soundex Indexing page</ulink> to
|
|
learn more about Soundex Indexing System.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationship calculator</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This utility calculates and displays the relationship
|
|
of any person to the active person.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Verify the database</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
This utility allows you to verify the database based
|
|
on the set of criteria specified by you.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>
|
|
|
|
Difference between Verify tool and previously
|
|
described Check tool
|
|
|
|
</title>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the
|
|
database structure. The Verify tool, however, is
|
|
detecting the records that do not satisfy your
|
|
particular criteria.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in
|
|
your database had children at the age of 98. Based on
|
|
common sense, such a record would indicate an
|
|
error. However, it is not a consistency error in the
|
|
database. Besides, someone might have a child at the
|
|
age of 98 (although this rarely happens). The Verify
|
|
tool will display everything that violates your
|
|
criteria so that you can check whether the record is
|
|
erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is yours.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-settings">
|
|
|
|
<title>Settings</title>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-prefs">
|
|
<title>Preferences</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most of the settings in &app;, are configured in the
|
|
<guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog. To invoke it, choose
|
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Preferences...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. </para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="prefs-fig">
|
|
<title>Preferences dialog</title>
|
|
<screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
|
|
fileref="figures/prefs.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Preferences dialog. </phrase>
|
|
</textobject></mediaobject></screenshot></figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The pane on the left displays the tree of available option
|
|
categories. Selecting a tree node will display the corresponding
|
|
options in the right side of the dialog. </para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-db">
|
|
<title>Database</title>
|
|
<para> This category contains preferences relevant to the
|
|
database itself. It has the following subcategories: </para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Automatically
|
|
load last database</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Check this box to automatically load the
|
|
last open database on startup. </para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Family name guessing</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This option affects the initial family name of a
|
|
child when he/she is added to the database. </para>
|
|
|
|
<tip><para>This option only
|
|
affects the initial family name guessed by &app; when the
|
|
<guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog is launched. You can modify
|
|
that name the way you see fit. Set this option to the value that you
|
|
will most frequently use, as it will save you a lot of
|
|
typing.</para></tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>If <guilabel>None</guilabel> is selected, no guessing will be
|
|
attempted. Selecting <guilabel>Father's surname</guilabel> will use
|
|
the family name of the father. Selecting <guilabel>Combination of
|
|
mother's and father's surname</guilabel> will use the father's name
|
|
followed by the mother's name. Finally, <guilabel>Icelandic
|
|
style</guilabel> will use the father's given name followed by the
|
|
"sson" suffix (e.g. the son of Edwin will be guessed as
|
|
Edwinsson).
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>GRAMPS IDs</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Enter ID prefixes for various kinds of database
|
|
entries into the corresponding text entry fields.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip><para>The ID prefixes use formatting conventions common for
|
|
C, Python, and other programming languages. For example, the %04d
|
|
expands to an integer, prepended with zeros to have the total
|
|
width of four digits. If you would like IDs to be 1, 2, 3, etc,
|
|
simply set the formatting parameter to %d.
|
|
</para></tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Researcher Information</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Enter your personal information in the corresponding
|
|
text entry fields. Although &app; requests information about you,
|
|
this information is used only so that &app; can create valid GEDCOM
|
|
output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information about the file's
|
|
creator. If you choose, you may leave the information empty, however
|
|
none of your exported GEDCOM files will be valid.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-display">
|
|
<title>Display</title>
|
|
<para> This category contains preferences relevant to
|
|
displaying database records and controls in &app;.
|
|
It has the following subcategories:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Default view</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This determines which view will appear when
|
|
you start &app;. Choose between Person and Family views.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Family view style</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This selects between the two available styles
|
|
of the Family view layout. The <guilabel>Left to right</guilabel>
|
|
style is similar to the Family Tree Maker (tm), while the
|
|
<guilabel>Top to bottom</guilabel> is similar to the Reunion.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Always display the LDS ordinance
|
|
tabs</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Check this box to have LDS ordinance tabs
|
|
displayed. If you do not know what LDS is then you probably
|
|
should not check it. </para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Display Tip of the
|
|
Day</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Check this box to have the <guilabel>Tip
|
|
of the Day</guilabel> dialog appear on every startup.
|
|
The tips are displayed randomly from the large collection
|
|
of information bits on &app;.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip><para>The <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel> is likely
|
|
to be useful for new user of &app;.
|
|
</para></tip>
|
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Dates</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para> Select the display format for the dates
|
|
from the available formats listed in this menu.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip><para>Available date display formats are language-specific.
|
|
Depending on whether or not there is a &app; date displayer
|
|
available for your language, you may or may not have a lot of
|
|
choices.
|
|
</para></tip>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Toolbar and Statusbar</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Toolbar</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Select the desired appearance of the toolbar
|
|
icons from the menu. Selecting <guilabel>GNOME
|
|
Settings</guilabel> will use the overall settings selected
|
|
for your GNOME desktop.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Statusbar</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem><para> Select the desired contents displayed in the
|
|
statusbar using the radio buttons.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-prefs-other">
|
|
<title>Other settings</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Besides <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog, there are
|
|
other settings available in &app;. For various reasons they have been
|
|
made more readily accessible, as listed below.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Column Editor</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The columns of the list views may be added, removed, or reordered
|
|
in a <guilabel>Column Editor Dialog</guilabel>,
|
|
see <xref linkend="column-editor-fig"/>. Only checked columns will
|
|
be shown in the view. To change their order, drag any column to its desired place inside
|
|
the editor. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will reflect the changes
|
|
in the appropriate view. To invoke <guilabel>Column Editor Dialog</guilabel>,
|
|
choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Column
|
|
Editor...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> is available
|
|
and works in the same way for all list views.
|
|
Specifically, it is available for People View, Family View (children list).
|
|
Sources View, Places View, and Media View.</para> </tip>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Setting Home person</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>The Home person is the person who becomes active
|
|
when database opened, when <guibutton>Home</guibutton> button is clicked
|
|
or the <guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem> menu item is selected from
|
|
either <guimenu>Go</guimenu> menu or the right-click context menu
|
|
anywhere.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To set Home person, make the desired person active and
|
|
then choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Set Home
|
|
person...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Adjusting viewing controls</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Whether the toolbar, the sidebar, or the filter (People View
|
|
only) are displayed in the main window is adjusted through
|
|
the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-prefs-adv">
|
|
<title>Advanced manipulation of settings</title>
|
|
|
|
<warning><para>The contents of this section is outside the scope
|
|
of interest of a general user of &app;. If you proceed with tweaking
|
|
the options on the low level you may damage your &app; installation.
|
|
Be careful. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED!
|
|
</para></warning>
|
|
|
|
<para>By default, &app; stores its settings using gconf2 system.
|
|
All the settings used in this version of &app; are stored in
|
|
subdirectories under <filename>/apps/gramps/</filename> in the
|
|
gconf2 namespace. Accessing the keys can be done either using
|
|
<command>gconftool-2</command> command line tool, or the
|
|
<command>gconf-editor</command> GUI tool.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>All keys are documented, and the notification mechanisms
|
|
are used as appropriate. Therefore, updating keys from outside
|
|
of &app; should lead to updating &app; in real time, without
|
|
necessarily restarting it.</para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="append-keybind">
|
|
|
|
<title>Keybindings reference</title>
|
|
<para>Most of the standard menu items define equivalent keybindings.
|
|
These are apparent because they are displayed on the right of
|
|
the menu item. However, some keybindings are not associated with
|
|
any items in the menu. </para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This appendix contains the list of keybindings that are not
|
|
displayed in menus of &app;.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="keybind-lists">
|
|
<title>List Views</title>
|
|
<para>The following bindings are available in all list views:
|
|
People View, Sources View, Places View, and Media View.</para>
|
|
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1"/>
|
|
<colspec colname="col2"/>
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0" valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Invoke <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog
|
|
with the selected person.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="keybind-family">
|
|
<title>Family View</title>
|
|
<para>The bindings available in the Family View depend on where the
|
|
focus is. The following tables list the bindings for all focus
|
|
targets.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Focus on the Active Person</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1"/>
|
|
<colspec colname="col2"/>
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0" valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Invoke <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog with
|
|
the active person.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap>
|
|
or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Swap the Active Person and the selected spouse.
|
|
Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> in standard Family View and
|
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> in alternative Family
|
|
View.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Focus on the Spouse box</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1"/>
|
|
<colspec colname="col2"/>
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0" valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Edit relationship between the Active Person and
|
|
the selected spouse.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Edit the personal information for the selected
|
|
spouse.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Add a person from the database to the spouse
|
|
list.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Add a new person to the database and to the spouse
|
|
list.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Delete the selected spouse from the spouse
|
|
list. The spouse is not deleted from the database.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap>
|
|
or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Swap the selected spouse and the Active Person.
|
|
Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> in standard Family View and
|
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> in alternative Family
|
|
View.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Focus on the Parents box</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1"/>
|
|
<colspec colname="col2"/>
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0" valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Edit relationship between the parents and their
|
|
child (either the Active Person or the selected spouse, depending
|
|
which parents box the focus is in).</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Add a new set of parents from the database to the
|
|
list.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Add a new set of parents to the database and to the
|
|
list.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Delete the selected parents from the list.
|
|
The parents are not deleted from the database.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap>
|
|
or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Make the selected parents the active family.
|
|
Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> in standard Family View and
|
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> in alternative Family
|
|
View.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Focus on the Children box</term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1"/>
|
|
<colspec colname="col2"/>
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0" valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Edit relationship between the child and his/her
|
|
parents (the Active Person and the selected
|
|
spouse).</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Edit the personal information for the selected
|
|
child.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Add a new person from the database to the children
|
|
list.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Add a new person to the database and to the children
|
|
list.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Delete the selected child from the list.
|
|
The child is not deleted from the database.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap>
|
|
or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry><para>Make the selected child the Active Person.
|
|
Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> in standard Family View and
|
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> in alternative Family
|
|
View.</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="append-filtref">
|
|
|
|
<title>Filter rules reference</title>
|
|
<para>This appendix lists of all the filter rules currently defined
|
|
in &app;. Each of these rules is available for use when creating custom
|
|
filters, see <xref linkend="tools-util-cfe"/>. The rules are
|
|
listed by their categories.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-general">
|
|
<title>General filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following most general rules:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has complete record</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches all people whose records are
|
|
marked as complete. Currently, the completeness of personal
|
|
information is marked manually, in the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
|
|
dialog.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People with incomplete names</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches all people with either
|
|
given name or family name missing.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is bookmarked person</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches all people who are on the
|
|
bookmark list.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has text matching substring of</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches all people whose records contain
|
|
specified substring. All textual records are searched. Optionally,
|
|
the search can be made case sensitive, or a regular expression
|
|
match.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Everyone</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches any person in the database.
|
|
As such it is not very useful on its own except for testing purposes.
|
|
However, it may be useful in combinations with other rules.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People probably alive</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches all people whose records do
|
|
not indicate their death and who are not unreasonably old,
|
|
judging by their available birth data and today's date.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has a name</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches any person whose name
|
|
matches the specified value in full or in part. For example,
|
|
Marta Ericsdotter will be matched by the rule using the
|
|
value "eric" for the family name.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> Separate values can be used for Given name, Family name,
|
|
Suffix, and the Title. The rule returns a match if, and only if,
|
|
all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
|
|
name. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the Id</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches any person with a specified
|
|
&app; ID. The rule returns a match only if the ID is matched
|
|
exactly.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
|
|
select a person from the list by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
|
|
ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is default person</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches the default (home) person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People marked private</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people whose records are marked
|
|
as private.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a female</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches any female person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People who have images</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people with images in their
|
|
galleries.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People without a birth date</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people missing birth date.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a male</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches any male person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-event">
|
|
<title>Event filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people
|
|
based on their recorded events:</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the birth</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people whose birth event
|
|
matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description.
|
|
The rule returns a match even if the person's birth event matches
|
|
the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive.
|
|
For example, anyone born in Sweden will be matched by the rule
|
|
using the value "sw" for the Place.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> The rule returns a match if, and only if,
|
|
all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
|
|
birth. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the death</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people whose death event
|
|
matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description.
|
|
The rule returns a match even if the person's death event
|
|
matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive.
|
|
For example, anyone who died in Sweden
|
|
will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the Place.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> The rule returns a match if, and only if,
|
|
all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
|
|
death. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has source of</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people whose records refer
|
|
to the specified source.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the personal event</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people that have a personal
|
|
event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place,
|
|
and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's
|
|
event matches the value partially. The matching rules are
|
|
case-insensitive. For example, anyone who graduated
|
|
in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the Graduation event
|
|
and the value "sw" for the Place.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> The personal events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
|
|
The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values
|
|
are (partially) matched by the personal event.
|
|
To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the family event</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people that have a family
|
|
event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place,
|
|
and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's
|
|
event matches the value partially. The matching rules are
|
|
case-insensitive. For example, anyone who was married in Sweden
|
|
will be matched by the rule using the Marriage event and the
|
|
value "sw" for the Place.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> The family events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
|
|
The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values
|
|
are (partially) matched by the personal event.
|
|
To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Witness</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are present as
|
|
a witness in the event. If the personal or family event type is
|
|
specified, only the events of this type will be searched.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People with incomplete events</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people missing date or place in
|
|
any personal event.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Families with incomplete events</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people missing date or place in
|
|
any family event of any of their families.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-family">
|
|
<title>Family filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people
|
|
based on their family relationships:</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People with children</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people with children.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People with multiple marriage records</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people with more than one spouse.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People with no marriage records</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people with no spouses.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>People who were adopted</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches adopted people.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the relationships</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people with a particular
|
|
relationship. The relationship must match the type selected from
|
|
the menu. Optionally, the number of relationships and the number
|
|
of children can be specified.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> The rule returns a match if, and only if,
|
|
all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
|
|
relationship. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is spouse of filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people married to someone
|
|
who is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a child of filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people for whom either parent
|
|
is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a parent of filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people whose child
|
|
is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a sibling of filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people whose sibling
|
|
is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-ancestral">
|
|
<title>Ancestral filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people
|
|
based on their ancestral relations to other people:</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is an ancestor of</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
|
|
specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
|
|
specified person should be considered his/her own ancestor (useful
|
|
for building reports).
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
|
|
select a person from the list by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
|
|
ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is an ancestor of person at
|
|
least N generations away</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
|
|
specified person and are at least N generations away from that person
|
|
in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
|
|
for the number of generations will match grandparents,
|
|
great-grandparents, etc., but not the parents of the specified
|
|
person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is an ancestor of person not more
|
|
than N generations away</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
|
|
specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
|
|
person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value
|
|
of 2 for the number of generations will match parents and
|
|
grandparents, but not great-grandparents, etc., of the specified
|
|
person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has a common ancestor with</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who have common ancestors
|
|
with the specified person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has a common ancestor with filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who have common ancestors
|
|
with someone who is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is an ancestor of filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are ancestors
|
|
of someone who is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-descendant">
|
|
<title>Descendant filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people
|
|
based on their descendant relations to other people:</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a descendant of</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
|
|
specified person should be considered his/her own descendant (useful
|
|
for building reports).
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
|
|
select a person from the list by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
|
|
ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a descendant of person at
|
|
least N generations away</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person and are at least N generations away from that person
|
|
in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
|
|
for the number of generations will match grandchildren,
|
|
great-grandchildren, etc., but not the children of the specified
|
|
person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a descendant of person not more
|
|
than N generations away</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
|
|
person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value
|
|
of 2 for the number of generations will match children and
|
|
grandchildren, but not great-grandchildren, etc., of the specified
|
|
person.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a descendant of filter match</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are descendants
|
|
of someone who is matched by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Is a descendant family member of</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule not only matches people who are
|
|
descendants of the specified person, but also those descendants'
|
|
spouses.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-relat">
|
|
<title>Relationship filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people
|
|
based on their mutual relationship:</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Relationship path between two people</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches all ancestors of both people
|
|
back to their common ancestors (if exist). This produces the
|
|
"relationship path" between these two people, through
|
|
their common ancestors.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para> You can either enter the ID of each person into the
|
|
appropriate text entry fields, or select people from the list by
|
|
clicking their <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> buttons. In the
|
|
latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the
|
|
selection was made.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-misc">
|
|
<title>Miscellaneous filters</title>
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules which do not
|
|
naturally fit into any of the above categories:</para>
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the personal attribute</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who have the personal
|
|
attribute of the specified value. The specified personal attribute
|
|
name should be selected from the menu. The specified value should
|
|
be typed into the text entry field.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Has the family attribute</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who have the family
|
|
attribute of the specified value. The specified family attribute
|
|
should be selected from the menu. The specified value should be
|
|
typed into the text entry field.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term>Matches the filter named</term>
|
|
<listitem><para> This rule matches people who are matched
|
|
by the specified filter.
|
|
The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
|
|
</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
<!-- &cmdline; -->
|
|
<appendix id="mayapp-bugs">
|
|
|
|
<title>Known Bugs and Limitations</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The known limitations include the BSDDB performance issues related
|
|
to caching and the memory size. As long as the BSDDB cache fits completely
|
|
into the available memory on the system, the performance should be
|
|
adequate. When the cache size exceeds that of the free memory and
|
|
portions of database cache start to be swapped onto the disk, the performance
|
|
degrades appreciably. This can be solved by adjusting the BSDDB cache
|
|
size for the large databases.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
</appendix >
|
|
<appendix id="gramps-about">
|
|
|
|
<title>About GRAMPS</title>
|
|
<para> &app; was written by Donald N. Allingham
|
|
(<email>don@gramps-project.org</email>).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
The somewhat incomplete list of contributors includes (in alphabetical order):
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<listitem><para>Larry Allingham</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Larry Allingham, Jr.</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Jens Arvidsson</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Marcos Bedinelli</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Douglas S. Blank</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Radu Bogdan Mare</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Alexander Bogdashevsky</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Richard Bos</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Nathan Bullock</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Lorenzo Cappelletti</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Pier Luigi Cinquantini</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Bruce J. DeGrasse</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Alexandre Duret-Lutz</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Billy C. Earney</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Baruch Even</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Bernd Felsche</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Egyeki Gergely</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Michel Guitel</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Steve Hall</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>David R. Hampton</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Martin Hawlisch</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Anton Huber</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Frode Jemtland</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Greg Kuperberg</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Arkadiusz Lipiec</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Lars Kr. Lundin</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Radek Malcic</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Leonid Mamtchenkov</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Tino Meinen</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Frederick Noronha</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Jeffrey C. Ollie</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Donald A. Peterson</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Guillaume Pratte</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Laurent Protois</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Matthieu Pupat</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Trevor Rhodes</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Alexander Roitman</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Jason Salaz</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Julio Sanchez</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Bernd Schandl</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Martin Senftleben</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Gary Shao</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Jim Smart</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Steve Swales</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Eero Tamminen</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Samuel Tardieu</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Richard Taylor</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>James Treacy</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Sebastian Voecking</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Xing Wang</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Tim Waugh</para></listitem>
|
|
<listitem><para>Jesper Zedlitz</para></listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
If you know of somebody else who should be listed here, please let us know.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
To find more information about &app;, please visit the
|
|
<ulink url="http://gramps.sourceforge.net" type="http">GRAMPS Project
|
|
Web page</ulink>. </para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or
|
|
this manual, use the help menu in &app;, or follow the directions
|
|
on <ulink url="http://gramps.sourceforce.net/contact.html" type="http">this site.</ulink>
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
</book>
|